WO2021063372A1 - Resource determination method and device - Google Patents

Resource determination method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021063372A1
WO2021063372A1 PCT/CN2020/119061 CN2020119061W WO2021063372A1 WO 2021063372 A1 WO2021063372 A1 WO 2021063372A1 CN 2020119061 W CN2020119061 W CN 2020119061W WO 2021063372 A1 WO2021063372 A1 WO 2021063372A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
resource
information
node
protection parameter
switching
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/119061
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘凤威
宋兴华
邱晶
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021063372A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021063372A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method and device for determining resources.
  • the base station establishes a connection with the core network through optical fiber.
  • the relay node establishes a connection with the core network through a wireless backhaul link, which can save part of the fiber deployment cost.
  • the relay node establishes a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and accesses the core network through the upper-level nodes.
  • the upper-level node can perform certain control (for example, data scheduling, timing modulation, power control, etc.) on the relay node through a variety of signaling.
  • the relay node can provide services for multiple subordinate nodes.
  • the superior node of the relay node can be a base station or another relay node.
  • the lower-level node of the relay node may be a user equipment (UE) or another relay node.
  • the upper-level node may also be called the upstream node, and the lower-level node may also be called the downstream node.
  • In-band relay is a relay solution in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, the in-band relay has the advantages of high spectrum efficiency and low deployment cost. In-band relay generally has a half-duplex constraint. Specifically, a relay node cannot send a downlink signal to its lower-level node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its upper-level node, while a relay node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its lower-level node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its superior node.
  • the in-band relay solution of the new generation wireless communication system (new radio, NR) is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node.
  • the access link (the link that communicates with the subordinate UE) and the backhaul link (the link that communicates with the upper-level node) perform resource multiplexing in a time division, space division, or frequency division manner.
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • the backhaul link and the access link work at different times. Therefore, the IAB node needs to be between the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the transmission and reception of the access link. Switch.
  • the IAB node needs to determine the set of available symbols for the backhaul link and the access link.
  • the IAB node In order to improve the resource utilization of the backhaul link and the access link, the IAB node needs to determine the time domain position of the backhaul link and the access link. How to determine the time domain position of the backhaul link is a problem that needs to be solved urgently.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a resource determination method and device, which can accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a resource.
  • the method includes: a first node determines a time domain position of a resource of a distribution unit DU of a communication device; and the first node determines multiple sets of time of a mobile terminal MT of the communication device.
  • the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information, the second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information; wherein, the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information, and The time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, the protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index The information is the index of the end symbol of the available resources of the MT.
  • the embodiments of the present application can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT based on the MT's receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information, and then accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
  • the second information is receiving configuration information, or the second information is cell group information
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT
  • the protection parameter is the difference between the DU resource and the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
  • the first node may determine multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information (or received configuration information) in the multiple cell group information (or received configuration information). That is, the first node can determine different downlink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information (or receiving configuration information).
  • the second information is receiving configuration information
  • the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT. Based on this possible implementation manner, different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different cell group information, and different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different reception configuration information in the same cell group information.
  • the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information of the control resource settings configured by the MT, or the receiving configuration information is The reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH where the MT is configured.
  • the second information is the transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information;
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the protection parameter is the DU resource and the MT uplink resource.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the uplink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resource of the MT.
  • the first node may determine multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information (or sending configuration information) in the multiple cell group information (or sending configuration information). That is, the first node can determine different uplink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information (or sending configuration information).
  • the second information is sending configuration information
  • the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT. Based on this possible implementation manner, different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different cell group information, and different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different transmission configuration information in the same cell group information.
  • the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured by the MT, or the sending configuration The information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
  • the first node is a communication device, or the first node is an upper node or host node of the communication device.
  • the first node may also receive the indication information reported by the communication device, and the indication information is used to indicate each of the multiple second messages of the MT The first information corresponding to the second information.
  • the upper-level node or host node of the communication device can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
  • the first node may also determine the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
  • the first node is a communication device
  • it may also report indication information to the second node.
  • the indication information is used to indicate multiple second pieces of the MT.
  • the first information corresponding to each second information in the information, and the second node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device.
  • the upper-level node or host node of the communication device can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining protection parameters, applied to a first node, and the method includes: determining first information, where the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter, The first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU; and the MT resource is determined according to the first information.
  • the flexible resource of the DU is a protection parameter for switching, where the flexible resource includes a resource used for uplink and a resource used for downlink. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources can be accurately determined.
  • the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum or minimum of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter. value. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources can be accurately determined.
  • the first information includes the first protection parameter.
  • the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can also be determined to be uplink; the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information.
  • the specific implementation of the switching protection parameter is: determining the first protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the DU flexible resource can be accurately determined based on the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first information includes the second protection parameter.
  • the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can also be determined to be downlink; the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information.
  • the specific implementation of the switching protection parameter is: determining the second protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the DU flexible resource can be accurately determined based on the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first node is a communication device, and can also receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the first node, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the superior node or host node of the first node can configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU for the first node, so that the first node can accurately determine the MT based on the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter for switching between the resource and the flexible resource of the DU is a communication device, and can also receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the first node, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the superior node or host node of the first node can configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU for the first node, so that the first node can accurately determine the MT based on the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first node is a communication device, and reports the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node.
  • the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can be assumed by the first node itself. Therefore, based on this possible implementation, the first node can report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node, so that the superior node or the host node can accurately determine the MT based on the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter for switching between the resource and the flexible resource of the DU is a communication device, and reports the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node.
  • the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can be assumed by the first node itself. Therefore, based on this possible implementation, the first node can report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node, so that the superior node or the host node can accurately
  • the first node is a communication device, and the first node may also report a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node.
  • the upper-level node or the host node can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource reported by the first node and the flexible resource of the DU, so that the upper-level node or the host node can deduce the time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameters, and then According to the time domain position of the MT, resource scheduling is performed reasonably to avoid resource conflicts.
  • the first node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device, and sends configuration information to the communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the superior node or host node of the communication device can configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU for the communication device, so that the communication device can accurately determine the MT resource and the hypothetical resource type of the DU according to the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Protection parameters for flexible resource switching.
  • the first node is an upper node or host node of the communication device, and the first node may also receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device.
  • the upper-level node or the host node can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource reported by the first node and the flexible resource of the DU, so that the upper-level node or the host node can deduce the time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameters, and then According to the time domain position of the MT, resource scheduling is performed reasonably to avoid resource conflicts.
  • a device for determining a resource may be a first node, or a chip or chipset in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper-level node of the communication device Or host node.
  • the resource determining device may also be a chip system.
  • the resource determining device can perform the method described in the first aspect.
  • the function of the resource determining device can be realized by hardware, or can be realized by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the unit can be software and/or hardware.
  • a device for determining protection parameters may be a first node, or a chip or chipset in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper level of the communication device Node or host node.
  • the protection parameter determination device may also be a chip system.
  • the protection parameter determination device can execute the method described in the second aspect.
  • the function of the protection parameter determination device can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the unit can be software and/or hardware.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a resource determining device.
  • the resource determining device includes a communication interface and a processor.
  • the communication interface is used for communication between the device and other devices, for example, data or signal transmission and reception.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface.
  • the processor is used to call a set of programs, instructions or data to execute the method described in the first aspect.
  • the device may also include a memory for storing programs, instructions or data called by the processor.
  • the memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes instructions or data stored in the memory, the method described in the first aspect can be implemented.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a protection parameter determination device.
  • the protection parameter determination device includes a communication interface and a processor.
  • the communication interface is used for communication between the device and other devices, such as data or signal transmission and reception. .
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface.
  • the processor is used to call a set of programs, instructions or data to execute the method described in the second aspect above.
  • the device may also include a memory for storing programs, instructions or data called by the processor. The memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes instructions or data stored in the memory, the method described in the second aspect can be implemented.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, configured to implement the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store instructions, and when the instructions are executed, the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect is achieve.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product including instructions, which when executed, enable the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect to be implemented.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication signal, including a first node and a second node, where the first node is an upper-level node of the second node, and the second node is as described in the third aspect or the fourth aspect. Mentioned device.
  • the embodiments of the present application can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT based on the MT's receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information, and then accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a backhaul link and an access link provided by an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of IAB node communication provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB node provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a relationship between MT resources and DU resources provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT symbol and a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT frame and a DU frame according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 14A is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT frame and a DU frame according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a resource determining apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of another protection parameter determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a resource determining apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of another protection parameter determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • In-band relay is a relay solution in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, the in-band relay has the advantages of high spectrum efficiency and low deployment cost. In-band relay generally has a half-duplex constraint. Specifically, a relay node cannot send a downlink signal to its lower-level node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its upper-level node, while a relay node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its lower-level node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its superior node.
  • the in-band relay solution of the new generation wireless communication system (new radio, NR) is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node (IAB node).
  • the IAB node provides wireless access and wireless backhaul of access services for the UE.
  • the IAB donor node (IAB host node) provides the wireless backhaul function to the IAB node and provides the interface between the UE and the core network.
  • the IAB node is connected to the IAB donor node through a wireless backhaul link, so that the UE served by the IAB node is connected to the core network.
  • the access link and the backhaul link perform resource multiplexing in a time division, space division or frequency division manner.
  • TDM time-division multiplexing
  • the backhaul link and the access link work at different times. Therefore, the IAB node needs to perform the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the access link. Switch between.
  • the backhaul link and the access link are switched without interval, that is, when the access link symbol and the backhaul link symbol are continuous, the IAB node has the highest resource utilization rate.
  • the backhaul link and the access link cannot be switched without interval. Therefore, in order to improve the resource utilization of the backhaul link and the access link, the IAB node needs to accurately determine the available symbol set of the backhaul link and the access link.
  • the IAB node in NR can be divided into two parts, a mobile terminal (MT) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • MT is used for IAB nodes to communicate with upper-level nodes
  • DU is used for IAB nodes to communicate with lower-level nodes.
  • the upper-level node can be a common base station (such as gNB) or another IAB node; and the lower-level node can be a UE. It can also be another IAB node.
  • the link between the MT and the upper-level node is called the parent BH link
  • the link between the DU and the lower-level IAB node is called the child BH link
  • the communication link is called an access link.
  • the upper-level backhaul link includes the upper-level backhaul uplink (uplink, UL) and the upper-level backhaul downlink (downlink, DL)
  • the lower-level backhaul link includes the lower-level backhaul UL and the lower-level backhaul DL.
  • the link includes access to UL and access to DL, as shown in Figure 2.
  • the lower-level backhaul link is also called an access link.
  • the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured as downlink (D), uplink (U), and flexible (Flexible, F) according to the transmission direction. These three resource types are also supported by existing UEs, so they can be indicated by existing signaling.
  • the uplink resource of the MT is always used for uplink transmission
  • the downlink resource of the MT is always used for downlink transmission
  • the flexible resource of the MT means that the flexible resource can be indicated as being used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission under the configuration of signaling.
  • the DU resource of the IAB node includes three types: uplink, downlink, and flexible. Among them, the uplink resource of the DU is always used for uplink transmission, the downlink resource of the DU is always used for downlink transmission, and the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • uplink, downlink and flexible resources of the DU can also be classified into two types: hard (hard, H) and soft (soft, S) according to resource scheduling conditions.
  • DU hard resource indicates the resource that DU is always available.
  • DU soft resource Whether the DU is available depends on the instructions of the superior node.
  • the DU may also include Null resources.
  • the MT resource of the IAB node has 3 resource types (that is, three types based on the transmission direction: D/U/F), and the DU resource has 7 resource types (that is, three resource types (D/U/F) ) And two resource types (H/F), a total of 6 types, and a resource type N, a total of 7 types), 3 resource types of MT resources and 7 resource types of DU resources
  • the multiplexing mode of MT resource and DU resource is time division multiplexing TDM
  • Table 1 the behavior of all possible resource combinations of DU and MT can be as shown in Table 1. among them:
  • -"MT:Tx means that the MT should transmit after being scheduled
  • -"DU:Tx" indicates that DU may be transmitted
  • Rx means that the MT is capable of receiving (if there is a signal that needs to be received);
  • -"DU:Rx" indicates that DU may schedule the uplink transmission of the lower node
  • Tx/Rx means that the MT should transmit or receive after being scheduled, but the transmission and reception do not occur at the same time
  • -"DU:Tx/Rx means that DU may transmit or receive transmission from lower-level nodes, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;
  • -"MT:NULL means that the MT does not send and does not have to have the receiving capability
  • -"DU:NULL means that DU does not send and does not receive transmissions from lower-level nodes
  • the resource determination method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system with a relay node, as shown in FIG. 3. It should be understood that FIG. 3 is only an exemplary illustration, and does not specifically limit the number of terminal devices and relay devices included in the wireless communication system.
  • the relay device In NR, the relay device is generally called an IAB node.
  • the relay device In LTE, the relay device is generally called RN.
  • the communication system shown in Figure 3 can be in various communication systems, for example, the Internet of Things (IoT), narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT), and long term evolution (long term evolution).
  • LTE Internet of Things
  • NB-IoT narrowband Internet of Things
  • long term evolution long term evolution
  • LTE can also be a fifth-generation (5G) communication system
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • NR 5G new radio
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunications system
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • new communication systems that will appear in the development of future communications.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application is used to connect the terminal to the wireless network.
  • the network device may be called a base station, and may also be called a radio access network (RAN) node (or device).
  • the network equipment can be a next-generation Node B (gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), an evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), and a radio network controller (radio network controller).
  • network controller, RNC Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • home base station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B
  • HNB home evolved NodeB
  • BBU baseband unit
  • AP wireless fidelity access point
  • the relay node is one of the aforementioned base stations or terminal devices with forwarding function, or it can be an independent device form, it can also be a vehicle-mounted device, or set on a mobile object. installation.
  • the name of the relay node can be the relay node (RN), the relay transmission and reception point (rTRP), the IAB node (IAB node), etc.; the superior node of the relay node can be gNB (including gNB-DU, gNB-CU, etc.) ), it can also be another relay node.
  • the IAB node is a specific name of the relay node, which does not limit the solution of this application.
  • the IAB node of this application can also be called a relay node (RN) or a transmission and reception point (TRP) , Relay sending and receiving point (relaying TRP), etc.
  • a relay device may include a mobile terminal (MT) function and a distributed unit (DU) function. That is, the IAB node communicates with the superior node through the MT.
  • the DU is the base station function module of the IAB node, which is used to implement the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • the function of the layer is mainly responsible for scheduling, physical signal generation and transmission, that is, the IAB node communicates with the lower-level node and UE through the DU, as shown in Figure 4.
  • Both the MT and DU of the IAB node have a complete transceiver module, and there is an interface between the two.
  • MT and DU are logic modules. In practice, the two can share some sub-modules, for example, they can share transceiver antennas, baseband processing modules, etc., as shown in Figure 5.
  • the terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present application is an entity on the user side for receiving or transmitting signals.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like.
  • the terminal can also be other processing equipment connected to the wireless modem.
  • the terminal can communicate with one or more core networks through a radio access network (RAN).
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal can also be called a wireless terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, access point, Remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user equipment (user device), or user equipment (user equipment), etc.
  • the terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or called a "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal.
  • a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone (or called a "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal.
  • the terminal device can also be a personal communication service (PCS) phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), and other equipment.
  • Common terminal devices include, for example, mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., but this application is implemented Examples are not limited to this.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated object, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • the following at least one (item) or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item (item) or plural items (item).
  • At least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c It can be single or multiple.
  • words such as “first” and “second” are only used for the purpose of distinguishing description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor can it be understood as indicating Or imply the order.
  • the method for determining protection parameters and the resource determination method provided by the embodiments of this application can be implemented as two separate solutions. , Can also be combined as a plan for implementation, and there is no specific limitation here.
  • the communication device is an IAB node as an example for description.
  • the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between DU resources and MT resources.
  • the protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources can be understood as the guard period for switching between DU resources and MT resources, and the number of guard symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the "deviation" in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as "offset".
  • the guard interval for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource may specifically be: the guard interval when the MT resource is switched to the DU resource, or the guard interval when the DU resource is switched to the MT resource.
  • the guard interval for switching the MT resource to the DU resource refers to the overlap time of the DU resource plus the switching time and the MT resource, and the switching time is the shortest time required for the MT resource to switch to the DU resource.
  • the guard interval for switching the DU resource to the MT resource refers to the overlap time between the DU resource plus the switching time and the MT resource, and the switching time is the shortest time required for the DU resource to switch to the MT resource.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching from MT resources to DU resources, or the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching MT resources to DU resources refers to the symbols whose MT resources are not available in the previous specific direction (D/U/F) when DU resources in a specific direction (D/U/F) are transmitted quantity.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources refers to the symbols whose MT resources are not available in a specific direction (D/U/F) when DU resources in a specific direction (D/U/F) are transmitted. .
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT resource to the DU resource, or the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU resource to the MT resource.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching from MT resource to DU resource refers to the index of the start symbol of the DU resource (for example, the first symbol in a continuous segment of DU available symbols) and the end symbol of the MT resource (for example, a continuous segment of MT). The deviation between the index of the last available symbol in the available symbols).
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching from DU resource to MT resource refers to the index of the end symbol of the DU resource (for example, the last symbol in a continuous period of DU available symbols) and the start symbol of the MT resource (for example, a continuous period of MT available symbols).
  • the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
  • MT resource is only an exemplary naming of the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the upper-level node of the IAB node.
  • the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the upper-level node of the IAB node can also be named For others, such as X resources, if the X resources can be used for communication between the IAB node and the upper-level node of the IAB node, the X resources can be considered as the MT resources involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • DU resource is only an exemplary naming of the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node.
  • the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node can also be named Others, such as A resources, if the A resource can be used for the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node, the A resource can be considered as the DU resource involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the semi-static type configuration (D/U/F) of the MT resource of the IAB node is configured by the donor node or the superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling.
  • the semi-static signaling can be radio resource control (radio resource control). , RRC) signaling, etc.
  • the semi-static resource type (D/U/F) of the DU resource of the IAB node is configured by the donor node or the superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling or interface messages.
  • the interface message can be transmitted through the F1-AP interface News etc.
  • DU resources hard and soft
  • the donor node or superior node of the IAB node configures the DU resource (D/U/F) as hard and soft through semi-static signaling or interface messages.
  • the MT available/unavailable resources of the IAB node can be implicitly derived from the hard/soft resources of the DU of the IAB node.
  • the Null resource of the DU is also configured by the donor node or superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling or interface messages.
  • the hard resource of the DU has the following definition: the hard resource is the resource that is always available to the DU. That is, the IAB node can always communicate with the lower-level nodes on the hard resources of the DU, regardless of the scheduling configuration of the MT. Therefore, the relationship between the hard/soft resources of the DU and the available/unavailable resources of the MT is shown in Figure 6.
  • Figure 6 shows 7 time slots, among them, time slots 0 and 6 are hard time slots of the DU, and the DU can always be used. Assuming TDM multiplexing, the corresponding MT time slot is an unusable time slot.
  • the time slots 1 to 5 in the figure are soft time slots of the DU, and the corresponding MT should be an available time slot.
  • the availability of the soft resources of the DU will be determined through the dynamic indication or scheduling of the upper-level node, and some of the soft resources will be indicated as available. Assuming TDM multiplexing, when a soft resource is indicated as available, its corresponding MT resource is converted to unavailable. Therefore, when the IAB node derives the available/unavailable resources of the MT, it also needs to consider the result of dynamic resource indication or scheduling signaling.
  • the upper-level node when the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node is configured by the donor node, the upper-level node also needs to obtain the DU resource configuration information to determine the available/unavailable resources of the MT, so as to avoid scheduling conflicts.
  • the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node includes resource type (D/U/F) information and resource nature (H/S) information.
  • the donor node may send the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node to the DU of the superior node.
  • the IAB node reports its own DU resource configuration information to the superior node. The IAB node and its superior node derive the available resources and unavailable resources of the IAB node MT according to the DU configuration information of the IAB node, so as to perform the transmission of the backhaul link.
  • the superior node also needs to consider the result of dynamic resource indication or scheduling signaling when deriving the available/unavailable resources of the node in the IAB node MT. Since the dynamic indication or scheduling is generally sent by the upper-level node, the upper-level node can learn the result of the dynamic indication or scheduling.
  • the derivation of the available/unavailable resources of the MT has the following principle: the reception or transmission of the MT does not affect the use of the hard resources and/or the soft resources indicated as available by the DU.
  • the reception or transmission of the MT includes at least the reception or transmission of the unicast signal by the IAB node MT.
  • ⁇ DD The time difference between the MT downlink symbol and the DU downlink symbol.
  • ⁇ DD may be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference.
  • T DD T p + T e
  • T p the transmission delay between the IAB node and the upper-level node
  • T e includes the non-ideal factors of synchronization, such as the timing of the IAB node DU and the upper-level node. error.
  • ⁇ UU The time difference between the MT uplink symbol and the DU uplink symbol (hereinafter referred to as ⁇ UU ).
  • ⁇ UU may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference.
  • ⁇ UU is the time when MT uplink transmission is ahead of DU uplink reception as an example for description, and ⁇ UU ⁇ 0 is assumed.
  • ⁇ UU ⁇ DD + T g -TA, where T g is the time when the uplink receiving frame of the IAB node DU is ahead of the DU downlink sending frame, and TA is the timing used by the IAB node MT for uplink transmission Advance amount.
  • ⁇ DU The time difference between the MT downlink symbol and the DU uplink symbol.
  • ⁇ DU The time difference between the MT downlink symbol and the DU uplink symbol.
  • ⁇ DU may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference.
  • the time during which the downlink reception with ⁇ DU is MT lags behind the uplink reception of the DU is taken as an example for description, and it is assumed that ⁇ DU > 0.
  • ⁇ DU ⁇ DD +T g .
  • ⁇ UD The time difference between the MT uplink symbol and the DU downlink symbol.
  • ⁇ UD may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference.
  • ⁇ UD is the time when the MT uplink transmission is ahead of the DU uplink reception as an example for description, and it is assumed that ⁇ UD ⁇ 0.
  • ⁇ UU ⁇ DD -TA.
  • the time difference shown in FIG. 7 is the time difference between the MT symbol and the DU symbol, but in the protocol, the time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource generally represents the time difference between the MT frame or subframe and the DU frame or subframe.
  • ⁇ DD represents the lag of the start time of the MT frame relative to the start time of the DU frame, that is, the start time of the MT frame minus the start time of the corresponding DU frame .
  • ⁇ DD DU also be defined as the frame start time by subtracting the start time MT corresponding to the frame.
  • the time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource in the embodiment of this application may refer to the time difference between the MT symbol and the DU symbol, the time difference between the MT frame and the DU frame, or the time difference between the MT subframe and the DU subframe, of course. It can be the time difference of other time units, which is not specifically limited here. It should be noted that the time difference in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as time offset, time misalignment, and so on.
  • the switching time between MT transmission and DU transmission mainly includes the power amplifier off time required for sending to receiving (that is, the switching time from sending to receiving), and the power amplifier on time required for the conversion from receiving to sending (that is, the switching time from receiving to sending). , The gain adjustment time of receiving to receiving conversion (that is, the switching time from receiving to receiving) or the power adjusting time of sending to sending conversion (that is, the switching time of sending to sending).
  • the switching time between the two can be ignored, and when the power difference between the two received signals is large, the switching time between the two may be longer.
  • the switching time between the two can be ignored, and when the transmission power of the two signals differ greatly, the switching time between the two may be Longer. It should be understood that the time required for the various handovers described above is known by the IAB node, and the protocol may also define the maximum value required for various handovers.
  • the protection parameter when the IAB node determines the protection parameter, the protection parameter may be determined according to the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource. For example, for the handover between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources (that is, handover from reception to reception), when the power difference between the received signal of the DU and the received signal of the MT is small, the switching time between the two can be ignored. The time difference between the MT downlink resource and the MT downlink resource determines the protection parameters for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource.
  • the switching time between the two can be ignored.
  • the time difference between the downlink resource and the MT uplink resource determines the protection parameters for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource.
  • the protection parameters for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource can also be determined according to the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the switching time between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the switching time For switching between sending and receiving, for example, when an IAB node switches between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources, it can be based on the time difference between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources and the difference between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources.
  • the switching time determines the protection parameters for switching between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources.
  • the IAB node When the IAB node switches between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources, it can determine DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources according to the time difference between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources and the switching time between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources Protection parameters to switch between.
  • a handover between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources For the handover from reception to reception, for example, a handover between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources.
  • the switching time between the two cannot be ignored. It can be determined according to the time difference between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource and the switching time between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource. Protection parameters for switching between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources.
  • another example is the switch between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources.
  • the switching time between the two cannot be ignored. It can be determined according to the time difference between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource and the switching time between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource. Protection parameters for switching between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources.
  • Scenario 1 Determine protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU downlink resources.
  • IAB node Since the IAB node performs a receiving action on the MT downlink resource, and performs a sending action on the DU downlink resource. Therefore, when the IAB node switches between the MT downlink resource and the DU downlink resource, it needs to perform a transmit and receive switch or a transmit and receive switch.
  • IAB node may be based on the time difference ⁇ DD DU MT downlink resources and downlink resources, MT receiver to the switching time T1 DU transmitted, to determine protection switching MT downlink resource parameter DU downlink resources.
  • LAB MT downlink node based on the time and resources of downlink resources DU difference ⁇ DD and DU sent to the MT receives the switching time t2, switching determination DU downlink resource protection parameters to MT downlink resources.
  • the guard interval for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource.
  • this overlapping time t1 + ⁇ DD called MT downlink resource switched to a protection interval DU downlink resources.
  • downlink resource Gache DU for time t2 and time overlapping downlink resources for the MT t2- ⁇ DD To avoid resource conflicts, can not be performed within this period MT signal reception, the present application this overlapping time t2- ⁇ DD DU downlink resource called a guard interval is switched to the MT downlink resources.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU downlink resource.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU downlink resource.
  • ⁇ t may be the length of one symbol.
  • the symbol 4 is used for DU. If t1+ ⁇ DD is not greater than the length of one symbol, ⁇ DD is less than t2, and t2- ⁇ DD is not greater than the length of one symbol, we can get Indicates that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 1, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 1. Therefore, at the MT, except for the symbol 4 whose index overlaps, the symbol 3 and the symbol 5 are also unavailable.
  • the symbol 4 is used for DU. If the time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource is greater, the MT symbol with the same index as the DU symbol may be available. In this case, the protection symbol after the DU symbol may be recorded as a negative number. For example, if t1+ ⁇ DD is greater than the length of two symbols and not greater than the length of three symbols, ⁇ DD is greater than t2, and ⁇ t2- ⁇ DD ⁇ is greater than the length of one symbol, you can get It means that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 3, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is -1. Therefore, at the MT, symbol 4 with the same index is available, and symbols 1 to 3 are not available.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the MT downlink resource.
  • the deviation e between the indexes of the end symbols.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the MT downlink resource
  • the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
  • the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
  • the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
  • the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 0.
  • the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 4.
  • the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 4, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 0.
  • Scenario 2 Determine protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU uplink resources.
  • the IAB node can determine the MT downlink resource switching based on the time difference ⁇ DU between the MT downlink resource and the DU uplink resource and the switching time t3 from MT reception to DU reception Protection parameters of the uplink resources to the DU.
  • the LAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource based on the time difference ⁇ DU between the MT downlink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t4 from the DU reception to the MT reception.
  • the switching time from MT reception to DU reception may be the same as the switching time from DU reception to MT reception, that is, t3 may be equal to t4. Or, t3 may not be equal to t4.
  • the guard interval for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource.
  • the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t3 and MT downlink resource is t3+ ⁇ DU .
  • the MT cannot receive signals during this period of time.
  • This overlap time t3+ ⁇ DU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource in this application.
  • the overlap time of the DU uplink resource plus the switching time t4 and the MT downlink resource is t4- ⁇ DU .
  • the MT cannot perform signal reception during this period of time.
  • This overlapping time t4- ⁇ DU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource in this application.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU uplink resource.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
  • ⁇ t may be the length of one symbol.
  • the time taken to switch from receiving to receiving is relatively short, so the switching time from receiving to receiving can be ignored, that is, t3 and t4 can be equal to zero.
  • the symbol 4 is used for DU. If t3+ ⁇ DU is not greater than the length of one symbol, and t4- ⁇ DU is not greater than the length of one symbol, that is Indicates that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 1, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 0. Therefore, at the MT, except for the symbol 4 whose index overlaps, the symbol 3 is also unavailable.
  • the available symbol index deviation of the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation of switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource The deviation between e.
  • the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
  • the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
  • the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 5, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 1.
  • Scenario 3 Determine protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU uplink resources.
  • the IAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource based on the time difference ⁇ UU between the MT uplink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t1 sent by the MT to the DU reception.
  • the LAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource based on the time difference ⁇ UU between the MT uplink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t2 from the DU reception to the MT transmission.
  • the guard interval for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the guard interval when the MT uplink resource is switched to the DU uplink resource, or the guard interval when the DU uplink resource is switched to the MT uplink resource.
  • the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t1 and MT uplink resource is t1+ ⁇ UU .
  • the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time, and this overlapping time t1+ ⁇ UU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource in this application.
  • the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t2 and MT uplink resource is t2- ⁇ UU .
  • the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time.
  • This overlap time t2- ⁇ UU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource in this application.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU uplink resource.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
  • ⁇ t may be the length of one symbol.
  • t1+ ⁇ UU is not greater than the length of one symbol
  • t2- ⁇ UU is not greater than the length of one symbol
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the MT uplink resource.
  • the deviation e between the indexes of the end symbols.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the MT uplink resource.
  • the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
  • the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
  • the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
  • Scenario 4 Determine protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU downlink resources.
  • IAB node may thus time difference ⁇ UD MT uplink resource and the downlink resource based on DU, send to the switching time T5 MT DU transmitted, to determine protection switching MT uplink resource parameter DU downlink resources.
  • the node may be based on IAB time difference ⁇ UD MT uplink resource and the downlink resource based on DU, DU MT sends the transmission to the switching time t6, where DU uplink resource is determined to switch to the protection parameters MT downlink resources.
  • the switching time sent from the MT to the DU can be the same as the switching time from the DU to the MT, that is, t5 can be equal to t6. Or, t5 may not be equal to t6.
  • the guard interval for switching between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource.
  • the overlap time of DU downlink resource plus switching time t5 and MT uplink resource is t5+ ⁇ UD .
  • the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time.
  • This overlap time t5+ ⁇ UD is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource in this application.
  • the overlap time of DU downlink resource plus switching time t6 and MT uplink resource is t6- ⁇ UD .
  • the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time, and this overlapping time t6- ⁇ UD is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource in this application.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU downlink resource. Or, the number of protection symbols for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
  • ⁇ t may be the length of one symbol.
  • ⁇ UD is not greater than the length of one symbol, that is It can be defined that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 0, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 1.
  • DU uses symbol 4, at MT, except for symbol 4 whose index overlaps, symbol 5 is also unavailable, as shown in Figure 13.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the end of the MT uplink resource The deviation e between the indices of the symbols.
  • the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 3.
  • the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 1.
  • the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
  • the DU resource is switched to the protection symbol of the MT resource: if the number of protection symbols is N1, the DU uses the symbol M, and affected by the transmission of this symbol, the first available symbol of the subsequent MT is the symbol M+N1+ 1. If the calculated symbol index exceeds the maximum symbol index in the slot (that is, 13), it is extended to the next slot.
  • Figure 14A shows an example of three time slots (denoted as time slot 0, time slot 1 and time slot 2 in turn). Assuming that the number of protection symbols from DU to MT is 1, in Figure 14A, DU is in the time slot. The last available symbol of 1 is symbol 10, and the subsequent first MT symbol is symbol 12 of the simultaneous slot; and in Figure 14B, the last available symbol of DU in slot 0 is symbol 13, and the subsequent first symbol Each MT symbol is symbol 1 of the next slot.
  • Figure 14A shows an example of three time slots (denoted as time slot 0, time slot 1 and time slot 2 in turn). Assuming that the number of protection symbols from MT to DU is 1, in Figure 14A, the DU is in the time slot. The first available symbol of 1 is symbol 3, then the last MT symbol before is the symbol 1 of the simultaneous slot; and in Figure 14B, the first available symbol of DU in slot 2 is symbol 0, then the last symbol before One MT symbol is the symbol 12 of the previous time slot.
  • the above calculation formula of protection symbols may obtain the number of protection symbols with a negative number, and the number of protection symbols with a negative number indicates that MT and DU may use symbols with the same resource index. For example, assuming that the number of protection symbols from DU resource to MT resource is -1, and the index of the last available symbol of the DU is symbol 2, then the first available symbol of the subsequent MT is symbol 2 of the simultaneous slot.
  • the protocol does not define the number of protection symbols for negative numbers, that is, when the calculated number of protection symbols is negative, it is regarded as 0.
  • the MT available symbols determined by the above method are all possible available symbols, because the available symbols determined by the above method only consider the last DU symbol and the influence of the first DU symbol on the MT symbol, but not the remaining symbols. the elements of.
  • the available symbols of the actual MT should be the intersection of the available symbols derived from all relevant DU resources and protection symbol information.
  • the IAB node can determine the protection parameters in 8 handover situations, as shown in Table 2 below.
  • A1 represents the protection parameter for switching from MT downlink resource to DU uplink resource.
  • B1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource.
  • C1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource.
  • D1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource.
  • E1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource.
  • F1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource.
  • G1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource.
  • H2 represents the protection parameter for switching from DU downlink resources to MT uplink resources.
  • the IAB node can determine the number of guard symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources according to the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the IAB node can determine the available resources of the MT according to the resource configuration information of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource, or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the superior node or host node of the IAB node also needs to determine the available resources of the MT.
  • the superior node or host node of the IAB node may not obtain the number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources or the deviation of the available symbol index for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Therefore, the IAB node may also The upper-level node reports its protection parameters.
  • the IAB node can report one of the following protection parameters to its superior node or host node: the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the number of protection symbols that report the switching between DU resources and MT resources, and The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the superior node or host node of the IAB node can determine the number of protection symbols or DU resources for switching between DU resources and MT resources according to the guard interval.
  • the available symbol index deviation for switching with the MT resource, and then the available resource of the MT is determined according to the resource configuration information of the DU and the number of the protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation.
  • the IAB node may not report its protection parameters to its upper-level node or host node, and the IAB node may report the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource to its upper-level node or host node.
  • the protocol may define the maximum switching time for switching between DU resources and MT resources.
  • the superior node or host node of the IAB node determines the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource according to the time difference and the maximum switching time, and then can determine the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource according to the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the number of protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation, and then the resource available for the MT is determined according to the resource configuration information of the DU and the number of the protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation.
  • the IAB node can directly report the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource or the index of the end symbol of the MT available resource to its superior node or host node .
  • the start symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the first available symbol of the MT after the available symbols of a continuous DU.
  • the end symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the last available symbol of the MT before the available symbols of a continuous DU. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource is 6, and the index of the end symbol of the MT available resource is 3.
  • the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
  • the IAB node can report first information to its superior node or host node.
  • the first information includes protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the time difference between DU resources and MT resources, and MT available resources.
  • the upper-level node or the host node can determine the available resources of the MT according to the first information.
  • some protection parameters are related to the symbol length ⁇ t.
  • the reporting should be based on the assumption of a certain symbol length.
  • the symbol length assumptions include assumptions about subcarrier spacing and/or assumptions about cyclic prefix types.
  • the upper-level node of the IAB communicates with the MT using multiple beams. Therefore, there may be multiple time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources. Or, there may be multiple time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources. Therefore, only determining a set of time domain locations of the MT can no longer meet the needs of the IAB and superior nodes. Using a set of time domain locations of the MT for scheduling may cause resource conflicts. For this reason, the embodiment of the present application provides a resource determination method, which can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a method for determining a resource provided by this application. The method includes:
  • the first node determines the time domain location of the DU resource of the IAB node.
  • the first node may be the IAB node itself. In this case, the first node determines the time domain location of its own DU resource. Alternatively, the first node may also be an upper node or host node of the IAB node. In this case, the first node determines the time domain location of the DU resource of the IAB node.
  • the time domain position of the DU resource includes the time domain position of various types or properties of the DU resource.
  • the time domain position of the DU resource specifically includes the time domain position of the DU available resource.
  • the available resources of the DU include the resources that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard resources of the DU, and the available resources of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft resources of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
  • the IAB node may be a network device, such as a relay device, or it may be an IAB node. Or the IAB node may be a terminal device, such as a UE relay. Or the IAB node may also be other IAB nodes that need to return data with other IAB nodes, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
  • the time domain position may refer to a time domain index, such as a frame number, a time slot number, a symbol number, or a combination of the foregoing numbers, such as a time slot number plus a symbol number, and so on.
  • a time domain index such as a frame number, a time slot number, a symbol number, or a combination of the foregoing numbers, such as a time slot number plus a symbol number, and so on.
  • the first node determines multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT may specifically be multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT.
  • the multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information of the DU, and the multiple information of the MT.
  • the first information corresponding to each second information in the second information.
  • the second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information.
  • the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information.
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
  • the type of the DU resource can be uplink or downlink or flexible.
  • the uplink resource of the DU is always used for uplink transmission
  • the downlink resource of the DU is always used for downlink transmission
  • the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the type of MT resource can also be uplink or downlink or flexible.
  • the uplink resource of the MT is always used for uplink transmission
  • the downlink resource of the MT is always used for downlink transmission
  • the flexible resource of the MT means that the resource can be indicated as being used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission under the configuration of signaling.
  • the resource nature of the DU resource can be hard and soft.
  • the DU hard resource is a resource that is always available to the DU.
  • the availability of DU soft resources can be determined through dynamic indication signaling.
  • the upper-level node can directly indicate the availability of DU soft resources of the IAB node through signaling such as DCI.
  • the upper-level node may indicate the availability of the MT resource of the IAB node through signaling such as DCI, and the IAB node determines the availability of its DU soft resource according to the upper-level node's indication of the MT resource availability.
  • the dynamic resource indication information of the DU is used to indicate the soft resources available to the DU.
  • the receiving configuration information may be transmission configuration indicator (Transmission Configuration Indicator, TCI-state) information, quasi co-location (Quasico-location, QCL) information, or other receiving configuration information.
  • the sending configuration information may be SpatialRelationInfo or other sending configuration information.
  • the cell group information may be timing advance group (Timing advance group, TAG) information or cell group identification, etc.
  • the MT of the IAB node can determine the parameters used for downlink reception according to the receiving configuration information, including receiving timing, receiving beam, receiving spatial filter, or channel estimation parameters. Similarly, the MT of the IAB node can determine the parameters used for uplink transmission, including transmission timing, transmission beam, transmission power, or transmission spatial filter according to the transmission configuration information.
  • the protection parameter may be the protection parameter introduced in the foregoing protection parameter determination method.
  • the protection parameter may be a guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources, or an available symbol index deviation for switching between DU resources and MT resources.
  • the protection parameters please refer to the corresponding description in the above-mentioned protection parameter determination method, which will not be repeated here.
  • the start symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the first available symbol of the MT after the available symbols of a continuous DU.
  • the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
  • the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource may be 6.
  • the end symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the last available symbol of the MT before the available symbols of a continuous DU.
  • the index of the end symbol of the available resources of the MT may be 3.
  • the first node is based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information, the resource configuration information of the MT, and the multiple second information of the MT.
  • One or more items in the first information corresponding to each second information are used to determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT.
  • the resource configuration information of the MT includes the resource type (D/U/F) information of the MT.
  • the second information is TCI-state information
  • the first information is the number of protection symbols.
  • the MT is configured with two receiving configuration messages.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources corresponding to TCI-state#0 is 1, and the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources corresponding to TCI-state#1 is 1.
  • the number is 2.
  • the first node determines the first set of time domain locations based on one or more of the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the availability of the DU resource, and the number of protection symbols (1).
  • the first node determines the second set of time domain positions based on one or more of the time domain position of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the availability of the DU resource, and the number of protection symbols (2). Among them, the index of the first available symbol of the MT in the first set of time domain positions is 4, and the index of the first available symbol of the MT in the second set of time domain positions is 5.
  • the first node can determine different time domain positions of the MT based on the different reception configuration information of the MT.
  • the first set of time domain positions is used to receive the transmission corresponding to the configuration information 1.
  • the second set of time domain locations is used to receive the transmission corresponding to configuration information 2.
  • the second information is cell group information or sending configuration information
  • the first information is time difference or symbol index information, which will not be repeated here.
  • each second information in the plurality of second information may correspond to different first information, or part of the second information in the plurality of second information may also correspond to the same first information, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second parameter may be receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information.
  • the following first introduces the case where the second information is cell group information:
  • the time difference between DU resources and MT resources is specifically the time difference between DU resources and MT downlink resources, and protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources It is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
  • the first node may determine multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information. That is, the first node can determine different downlink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information.
  • the MT of the IAB node may be configured with multiple cell group information.
  • the cell group information is timing advance group (TAG) information.
  • TAG timing advance group
  • the uplink signal of the MT of the IAB node can adopt different uplink timings in different serving cells (or component carriers), or that the uplink signal of the MT can be configured (indicating) different uplink timing advances (TAs) in different serving cells. )the amount.
  • the MT may have different reception times when receiving downlink signals of serving cells (component carriers) corresponding to different TAGs. Therefore, when the MT is configured with multiple cell group information, the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D). For example, as shown in Fig.
  • the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D). And the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 3 below.
  • Table 3 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example.
  • the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1.
  • the time between the MT downlink resources and uplink resource DU difference having two, respectively, and ⁇ DU1 TAG # 1 corresponding to the time difference time difference corresponding to the TAG # 0 ⁇ DU2.
  • There are two time differences between MT downlink resources and DU downlink resources which are the time difference ⁇ DD1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the time difference ⁇ DD2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • Table 4 takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example.
  • the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1.
  • protection parameters for switching from MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources which are protection parameter A1 corresponding to TAG#0 and protection parameter A2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • protection parameters for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource There are two protection parameters for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, which are the protection parameter C1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the protection parameter C2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • protection parameters for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource which are the protection parameter D1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the protection parameter D2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 5 below.
  • Table 5 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example.
  • the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1.
  • the index of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource has two, respectively, the index of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0, M1 and the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the end symbol M2.
  • the DU uplink resource When the DU uplink resource is switched to the MT downlink resource, there are two start symbols of the MT available downlink resource, which are the index N1 of the start symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the starting symbol N2.
  • the MT downlink resource When the MT downlink resource is switched to the DU downlink resource, there are two end symbols of the MT available downlink resource, which are the index of the end symbol O1 of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the end of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the symbol O2.
  • multiple cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the start of the downlink resource available to the MT The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT), therefore, multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information.
  • the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is performed
  • the protection parameter of the handover is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the MT's uplink available resources, or the symbol index information is the end symbol of the MT's uplink available resources. index of.
  • the first node may determine multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information. That is, the first node can determine different uplink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information.
  • the MT of the IAB node may be configured with multiple cell group information.
  • the cell group information is timing advance group (TAG) information.
  • TAG timing advance group
  • the uplink signal of the MT of the IAB node can adopt different uplink timings in different serving cells (or component carriers), or that the uplink signal of the MT can be configured (indicating) different uplink timing advances (TAs) in different serving cells. )the amount. Therefore, when the MT is configured with multiple cell group information, there may be multiple time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D).
  • the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D).
  • the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available uplink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available uplink resources of the MT.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 6 below.
  • Table 6 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example.
  • the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1.
  • the time between the DU MT uplink resource and the uplink resource difference having two, respectively, a time difference [Delta] corresponding to the TAG # 0 UU1 time difference corresponding to TAG # 1 and ⁇ UU2.
  • There are two time differences between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource which are the time difference ⁇ UD1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the time difference ⁇ UD2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information and the protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 7 below.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 7 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • the correspondence relationship between the cell group information and the index of the start symbol of the downlink resource available for the MT or the index of the end symbol of the downlink resource available for the MT may be shown in Table 8 below.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 8 is the same as that in Table 5, and will not be repeated here.
  • multiple cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the start of the MT available uplink resource The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information.
  • the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the MT downlink resource
  • the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource It is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
  • the first node may determine the multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
  • MT downlink signals with different reception configuration information may have different arrival times, that is, MTs have different downlink frame reception timings.
  • the MT of the IAB node may use different timing reception windows when receiving downlink signals with different reception configuration information.
  • the MT of the IAB node may use different timing reception windows when receiving downlink signals with different reception configuration information.
  • the DU resource uses the DU resource as the downlink resource. Therefore, multiple received configuration information of the MT may correspond to multiple time differences between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource.
  • the multiple received configuration information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D).
  • the multiple received configuration information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT.
  • the correspondence between the received configuration information and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 9 below.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 9 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • the corresponding relationship between the received configuration information and the protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 10 below.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 10 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • the correspondence between the received configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 11 below.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 11 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • multiple received configuration information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the start of the downlink resource available to the MT The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource for the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
  • the multiple receiving configuration information of the MT of the present application is the receiving configuration information configured for the MT by the superior node of the IAB node.
  • the MT is configured with 5 receiving configuration information.
  • TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#2 are receiving configuration information for controlling resource settings.
  • TCI-state#3 and TCI-state#4 are physical downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Share Channel, PDSCH) reception configuration information.
  • the upper-level node of the IAB node can configure TCI-state#2 and TCI-state#3 for the IAB to correspond to the first information.
  • the multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#2 and TCI-state#3.
  • the received configuration information is the received configuration information set by the control resource configured by the MT.
  • the MT is configured with 3 control resource settings to receive configuration information. They are TCI-state#0 ⁇ TCI-state#2.
  • the multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#2.
  • the received configuration information is the received configuration information of the PDSCH configured by the MT.
  • the MT is configured with 4 control resource settings to receive configuration information. They are TCI-state#0 ⁇ TCI-state#3.
  • the multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#3.
  • the multiple reception configuration information of the MT corresponds to one cell group information of the MT. That is, different cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources. Furthermore, different protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT downlink resources that may correspond to different cell group information, and switching between DU resources and MT downlink resources that may correspond to different reception configuration information under the same cell group information Different protection parameters.
  • Different cell group information may correspond to the indexes of different start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to the indexes of different start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT.
  • Different cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available downlink resources, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available downlink resources.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information, the received configuration information, and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 12 below.
  • Table 12 below takes the cell group information as TAG information and the receiving configuration information as TCI-state information as an example.
  • the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1.
  • the MT is configured with 4 TCI-state information, namely TCI-state#0 ⁇ TCI-state#3.
  • the corresponding principle of the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU downlink resource is the same, and will not be repeated here.
  • the correspondence between cell group information, received configuration information, and protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 13 below.
  • the correspondence between the cell group information, the reception configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 14 below.
  • the multiple reception configuration information corresponding to the cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, and the MT available
  • the index of the start symbol of the downlink resource or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT) therefore, multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
  • the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the MT uplink resource
  • the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is
  • the protection parameter of the handover is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the MT's uplink available resources, or the symbol index information is the end symbol of the MT's uplink available resources. index of.
  • the IAB node MT can be configured with multiple spatial relationship information (SpatialRelationInfo), such as the spatial relationship information of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo) and the spatial relationship information of the sounding reference signal (SRS-SpatialRelationInfo).
  • spatialRelationInfo such as the spatial relationship information of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo) and the spatial relationship information of the sounding reference signal (SRS-SpatialRelationInfo).
  • PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo physical uplink control channel
  • SRS-SpatialRelationInfo the spatial relationship information of the sounding reference signal
  • multiple sending configuration information may correspond to multiple time differences between DU resources and MT uplink resources.
  • multiple transmission configuration information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D), and multiple transmission configuration information may correspond to multiple index or multiple starting symbols of MT available uplink resources. The index of the ending symbol.
  • the correspondence between the sending configuration information and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 15 below.
  • Table 15 takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example.
  • the corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 15 is the same as that in Table 5, and will not be repeated here.
  • Table 15 the correspondence between the transmission configuration information and the protection parameters for switching between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 15 below.
  • Table 16 below takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example. The corresponding principle of the correspondence in Table 16 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • Table 17 the correspondence between the transmission configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 17 below.
  • Table 17 below takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example.
  • the corresponding principle of the correspondence in Table 17 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • multiple transmission configuration information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the start of the MT available uplink resource The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each transmission configuration information in the multiple transmission configuration information.
  • the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured for the MT by the upper node of the communication device.
  • the MT is configured with 5 sending configuration information.
  • SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#2 are physical uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH) sending configuration information.
  • SpatialRelationInfo#3 and SpatialRelationInfo#4 are transmission configuration information for sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) transmission.
  • the superior node of the IAB node can configure SpatialRelationInfo#2 and SpatialRelationInfo#3 for the IAB to correspond to the first information.
  • the multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#2 and SpatialRelationInfo#3.
  • the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the PUCCH configured by the MT.
  • the MT is configured with the transmission configuration information of 3 PUCCHs. They are SpatialRelationInfo#0 ⁇ SpatialRelationInfo#2.
  • the multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#2.
  • the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the SRS configured by the MT.
  • the MT is configured with 4 SRS transmission configuration information. They are SpatialRelationInfo#0 ⁇ SpatialRelationInfo#3.
  • the multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#3.
  • multiple transmission configuration information of the MT corresponds to one cell group information of the MT. That is, different cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources. Furthermore, different protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT uplink resources that may correspond to different cell group information, and switching between DU resources and MT uplink resources that may correspond to different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information Different protection parameters. Different cell group information may correspond to different start symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different start symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources. Different cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources.
  • the correspondence relationship between the cell group information, the transmission configuration information, and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 18 below.
  • the correspondence between cell group information, transmission configuration information, and protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 19 below.
  • the correspondence relationship between the cell group information, the transmission configuration information, and the index of the start symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 20 below.
  • the first node when the first node is an IAB node, the first node also needs to determine the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT. For example, as shown in Table 3, the first node may determine the TAG # 0 corresponding to TAG # 1 and ⁇ DU1 corresponding ⁇ DU2. Regarding the determination method of the time difference, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method for determining the protection parameter, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first node After the first node determines ⁇ DU1 and ⁇ DU2 , it can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the DU uplink resource according to ⁇ DU1 , and obtain the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 according to ⁇ DU2 and Protection parameters for switching between DU uplink resources.
  • the first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the first set of MTs according to the protection parameters corresponding to TAG#0.
  • the first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the second set of MTs according to the protection parameters corresponding to TAG#1.
  • the first node may determine that the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 is switched to the protection parameter A1 of the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 is switched to the protection parameter A2 of the DU uplink resource.
  • the first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the first set of MTs according to the protection parameter A1 corresponding to TAG#0.
  • the first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the second set of MTs according to the protection parameter A2 corresponding to TAG#1.
  • the first node may determine the index M1 of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TCI-state#0 and the index M2 of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TCI-state#1.
  • the first node can determine the time domain position of the first set of MTs according to the index M1 corresponding to TCI-state#0.
  • the first node can determine the time domain position of the second set of MTs according to the index M2 corresponding to TCI-state#1.
  • the first node when the first node is an IAB node, after the first node determines the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT, it also needs to report to the superior node or host of the first node.
  • the node reports indication information, which is used to indicate the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information of the MT. Therefore, after the upper node or host node of the first node receives the indication information, it can determine the multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information.
  • the first node when the first node is the superior node or the host node of the IAB node, the first node may also receive the indication information reported by the IAB node.
  • the indication information is used to indicate each of the multiple second information of the MT The first information corresponding to the second information.
  • the first node After the first node receives the indication information, it can determine the multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information.
  • the indication information may specifically include the identifier of the receiving configuration information and the corresponding first information.
  • the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
  • the corresponding cell group ID such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
  • TCI-stateId // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
  • the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
  • the corresponding cell group ID such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
  • TCI-stateId // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
  • the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
  • the corresponding cell group ID such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
  • TCI-stateId // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
  • the following is an explanation of how to use one of the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT based on the time domain location of the first node based on the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource availability of the DU resource, and the second information of the MT.
  • Multiple sets of time domain locations to determine the MT are described in detail. Because the principle of determining the time domain position of each set of MT is the same. Therefore, the following is an example to determine a set of MT's time domain position for description:
  • the first node may calculate the last usable symbol of the MT according to the first DU usable symbol of a section of continuous DU usable symbols, or calculate the first usable symbol of the MT according to the last DU usable symbol of a section of continuous DU usable symbols.
  • the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
  • the first node may determine the position of the start symbol of the MT located behind the DU resource according to the position of the end symbol of the DU resource and the first information.
  • the first information is b, and b is the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources.
  • the first node determines that the position of the start symbol of the MT is after the end symbol of the DU resource and is separated by b symbols from the end symbol of the DU resource.
  • the first information is f, and f is the available symbol offset f for switching the DU resource to the MT resource.
  • the first node determines that the position of the start symbol of the MT is after the end symbol of the DU resource and is offset from the end symbol of the DU resource by f symbols.
  • the first node may determine the position of the end symbol of the MT resource located in front of the DU resource according to the position of the start symbol of the DU resource and the first information.
  • the first information is a
  • a is the number of protection symbols for switching the MT resource to the DU resource.
  • the first node determines that the end symbol of the MT resource is before the start symbol of the DU resource and is separated by a symbols from the start symbol of the DU resource.
  • the first information is e
  • e is the available symbol offset for switching the MT resource to the DU resource.
  • the first node determines that the position of the end symbol of the MT is after the start symbol of the DU resource and the offset from the start symbol of the DU resource is e symbols.
  • the first node needs to determine the protection parameter according to the time difference, and then determine the available time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameter.
  • the first node can determine the MT based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the start symbol of the MT available resource corresponding to each second information. Multiple sets of time domain positions. For example, the first node may determine the time slots in which the multiple start symbols of the MT available resources are respectively located according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the resource type of the DU resource, thereby determining multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT.
  • the first node can determine the number of MT based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the end symbol of the MT available resource corresponding to each second information. Set the time domain position. For example, the first node may determine the time slots in which the multiple end symbols of the MT available resources are respectively located according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the resource type of the DU resource, thereby determining multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT.
  • the first node can obtain the time domain position or index of the DU hard symbol of the IAB node by the following method: the host node of the IAB node configures the hard/soft resource type of the DU for the IAB node.
  • the special signal or channel of the IAB node DU is used to send or receive resources, and is converted into DU hard resource.
  • the special signal or channel can include but is not limited to synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB), random access channel (random access) channel, RACH), periodic channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), broadcast channel for sending system message 1 (system information block 1, SIB1), etc.
  • the special signal may be a cell-level signal or channel of the DU.
  • the donor node needs to send the special signal configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node. For example, the donor node sends the SSB configuration information, PRACH configuration information, and SIB1-PDCCH configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node.
  • the resources occupied by the IAB node DU sending CSI-RS or receiving SR (scheduling request) may also be regarded as hard resources by the IAB node and higher-level nodes.
  • the IAB node DU may frequently configure and reconfigure user-level CSI-RS And SR, etc., the donor node may not be able to send all the CSI-RS and SR configuration information to the superior node of the IAB node.
  • the donor node can regard part of the resources occupied by the CSI-RS or SR as hard resources of the IAB node DU.
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • SR SR or other IAB node DUs to receive and send signals, such as periodic physical uplink control channel PUCCH, tracking reference signal (Tracking Reference Signal, TRS).
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink control channel
  • TRS Tracking Reference Signal
  • the IAB node and its superior nodes need to have a consistent understanding of this part of the resources.
  • both the upper-level node and the IAB node need to know the CSI-RS resource configuration information that is regarded as a hard resource.
  • the donor node sends part of the CSI-RS configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node, and the Donor node also sends this part of the CSI-RS configuration information or identification information to the IAB node In this way, both the IAB node and the upper-level node can learn which CSI-RS resources are regarded as hard resources.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information may include configuration information such as CSI-RS time domain information, frequency domain information, and period information.
  • the IAB node may report part of the CSI-RS configuration information to the donor node, requesting the donor node to regard the resources occupied by this part of the CSI-RS as hard. After reporting part of the CSI-RS information, the IAB node regards the reported part of CSI-RS resources as hard resources.
  • reporting part of CSI-RS configuration information may be by indicating this part of CSI-RS time-frequency domain resources, or by indicating this part of CSI-RS index or list.
  • the donor node may send confirmation information to the IAB node, the confirmation information indicating whether the reported CSI-RS resources are regarded as hard resources, or which CSI-RS resources can be regarded as hard resources. It should be understood that part of the CSI-RS resources confirmed by the donor node may not be equal to the part of the CSI-RS resources reported by the IAB node.
  • the Donor node sends part or all of the CSI-RS resource information reported by the IAB node to the upper-level node of the IAB node, indicating that this part of the CSI-RS resources will be regarded as hard resources.
  • the IAB node and its upper-level node can insert the protection symbols according to the foregoing or following embodiment schemes.
  • Scenario 1 The first node determines the end position of the available symbols for the MT according to the boundary symbols of the DU hard resource and the number of protection symbols.
  • the first node determines A1 corresponding to TCI-state#0 (that is, the protection parameter for switching MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources) and A2 corresponding to TCI-state#1 (that is, the switching of MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources). Protection parameters).
  • the first node determines the first uplink hard symbol of the DU according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the type and nature of the DU resource. As shown in Figure 18, the first uplink hard symbol of the DU is symbol 4 of time slot 1. If A1 and A2 are the number a of protection symbols, A1 is equal to 1, and A2 is equal to 2.
  • the available symbol end position of the time domain position of the first set of MTs is symbol 2 of time slot 1
  • the time domain position of the first set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#0
  • the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#0 is performed at the time domain position of the first set of MT.
  • the time domain position of the second set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#1, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#1 is performed at the time domain position of the second set of MT.
  • the description of DU hard resources in scenario 1 is also applicable to DU soft resources that are dynamically determined to be available.
  • the first node determines the end position of the MT available symbol according to the boundary symbol of the DU hard resource and the deviation between the index of the start symbol of the DU resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT resource.
  • A1 and A2 are the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource, A1 is equal to 1, and A2 is equal to 2.
  • the first uplink hard symbol of the DU is symbol 4 of time slot 1.
  • the available symbol end position of the time domain position of the first set of MT is symbol 3 of time slot 1
  • the time domain position of the first set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#0
  • the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#0 is performed at the time domain position of the first set of MT.
  • the time domain position of the second set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#1, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#1 is performed at the time domain position of the second set of MT.
  • the description of DU hard resources in scenario 2 is also applicable to DU soft resources that are dynamically determined to be available.
  • the DU of the IAB node has multiple cells (cells), and different DU cells may have different DU resource configurations or time domain locations of available DU resources. At this time, to determine the time domain resources of the MT, the resource configuration of multiple DU cells needs to be considered.
  • the first information (ie, time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information) corresponding to different MT cell groups may correspond to handover between the MT cell group and different DU cells. For example, suppose that the protection parameters corresponding to the cell group 1 of the MT are different from the protection parameters corresponding to the cell group 2 of the MT.
  • the protection parameter corresponding to MT cell group 1 represents the protection parameter of handover between MT cell group 1 and DU cell group A
  • the protection parameter of MT cell group 2 represents the protection of handover between MT cell group 2 and DU cell group B. parameter.
  • the same MT cell and different DU cells may also have different protection parameters, and the determination and reporting methods are similar to those in the foregoing embodiment, and will not be repeated.
  • the second information may be a combination of MT cell (or component carrier) and DU cell.
  • the second information further includes sub-carrier spacing information of the guard symbols and/or cyclic prefix (CP) type information.
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • the value of the subcarrier spacing includes 15kHz or 30kHz or 60kHz, and for the high frequency band above 6GHz (including 6Ghz), the value of the subcarrier spacing includes 60kHz or 120kHz. Or 240kHz.
  • the superior node or host node of the first node requests the first node to report the first information
  • the superior node or host node may carry part or all of the second information when requesting the first node to report the first information.
  • the upper node or the donor node carries the cell identity of the first node MT and/or the cell identity of the first node DU in the request signaling.
  • the upper-level node or the host node carries the protection symbol sub-carrier spacing information and/or CP type in the request signaling.
  • the upper-level node or host node may carry the following information in the request signaling:
  • ServCellIndex //MT cell ID, which may contain one or more values
  • DUCellIndex // DU cell ID, which may contain one or more values
  • the first node After receiving the above request signaling, the first node reports the first information based on the second information in the request signaling, for example, reports the number of protection symbols based on the subcarrier interval information provided in the request signaling.
  • the upper-level node or the host node sends the first information to the first node, for example, the upper-level node or the host node configures the protection symbol number information to the first node.
  • the information about the number of protection symbols configured by the upper-level node or the host node indicates the number of protection symbols used by the upper-level node or the host node during backhaul link transmission.
  • the upper-level node or the host node configures the protection symbol number information, it may also carry part or all of the second information.
  • the upper-level node or host node may carry the following information when sending information about the number of protection symbols:
  • ServCellIndex //MT cell ID, which may contain one or more values
  • DUCellIndex // DU cell ID, which may contain one or more values
  • the first node and the superior node of the first node may have two sets of protection symbol information, one of which is the reported value, and the other is Is the configuration value.
  • the configuration value overrides the reported value, that is, the reported value is a subset of the configuration value.
  • the reported value and the configuration value are respectively applied to different scenarios. For example, for DU hard resources obtained from resource configuration information or DU available resources obtained according to dynamic indication signaling, the first node and the upper node determine the MT resource according to the information about the number of configured protection symbols; and for the cell-level signal from the IAB node DU For the converted DU hard resource, the first node and the upper-level node determine the MT resource according to the information about the number of protected symbols reported.
  • the method for determining protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU uplink resources/downlink resources is described above, and the method for determining protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources is described below.
  • the method includes:
  • the first node determines the first information.
  • the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter
  • the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter is the MT resource and the DU.
  • the protection parameters for handover of downlink resources That is, the first node determines the first protection parameter. Or, the first node determines the second protection parameter. Alternatively, the first node determines the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the uplink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the first node may be the IAB node itself.
  • the first node may also be an upper node or host node of the IAB node.
  • the IAB node may be a network device, such as a relay device, or it may be an IAB node.
  • the IAB node may be a terminal device, such as a UE relay.
  • the IAB node may also be other IAB nodes that need to return data with other IAB nodes, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first node determines, according to the first information, a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the first node determines the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information.
  • the first information acquired by the first node includes the first protection parameter and/or the second protection parameter.
  • the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the first protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU.
  • the number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the downlink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU.
  • the second protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the downlink resources of the MT and the downlink resources of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU. If it is determined that the flexible resource of the DU is switched to the protection parameter of the downlink resource of the MT. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the uplink resource of the DU to the downlink resource of the MT, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the downlink resource of the DU to the downlink resource of the MT.
  • the first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the MT downlink resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  • the first information acquired by the first node includes the first protection parameter and/or the second protection parameter.
  • the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the first protection parameter for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU may be the protection interval for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU.
  • the number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU may be the protection interval for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU.
  • the second protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the downlink resources of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
  • the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU. If it is determined that the flexible resource of the DU is switched to the protection parameter of the uplink resource of the MT. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the uplink resource of the DU to the uplink resource of the MT, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the downlink resource of the DU to the uplink resource of the MT.
  • the first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  • the first node specifically obtains the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  • the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is T1
  • the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is T2. If the guard interval T1 is greater than the guard interval T2.
  • the first node may determine the guard interval T1 as the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is 2, and the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is 1.
  • the first node may determine that the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU is 2.
  • the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the downlink resource of the DU is 3, and the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the uplink resource of the DU is 2.
  • the first node may determine that the available symbol index deviation of the MT's downlink resource switching to the DU's flexible resource is 3.
  • the first node specifically obtains the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the minimum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  • the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is T1
  • the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is T2. If the guard interval T1 is greater than the guard interval T2.
  • the first node may determine the guard interval T2 as the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is 2, and the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is 1.
  • the first node may determine that the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU is one.
  • the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the downlink resource of the DU is 3, and the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the uplink resource of the DU is 2.
  • the first node may determine that the available symbol index deviation of the MT's downlink resource switching to the DU's flexible resource is 2.
  • the first node may determine the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU; if the hypothetical resource type is uplink. Then the first node obtains the first protection parameter (that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU), and determines that the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. If it is assumed that the resource type is downlink. Then the first node obtains the second protection parameter (that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU), and determines that the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first protection parameter that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU
  • the second protection parameter that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU
  • the hypothetical resource type refers to the hypothetical DU flexible resource type.
  • the first node may assume that the start symbol of the DU flexible resource is an uplink symbol. The end symbol of the DU flexible resource is a downlink symbol. Then, the first node determines that the protection parameter of the uplink resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU is the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU. The first node determines that the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the DU to the MT resource is the protection parameter for switching the flexible resource of the DU to the MT resource.
  • the first node may assume that the start symbol of the DU flexible resource is a downlink symbol. The end symbol of the DU flexible resource is an uplink symbol. Then, the first node determines that the protection parameter of the downlink resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU is the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU. The first node determines that the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the DU to the MT resource is the protection parameter for switching the flexible resource of the DU to the MT resource.
  • the assumed resource type can be assumed by the IAB node itself.
  • the first node may also report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node of the first node. Therefore, the upper node or the host node of the first node can determine the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first node when the first node is the superior node or the host node of the IAB node, the first node may also receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the IAB node. The first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first node when the first node is the IAB node itself, the first node receives the configuration information sent by the superior node or the host node of the first node, and the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can be configured by the superior node or the host node of the IAB node for the IAB node.
  • the first node when the first node is the superior node or host node of the IAB node, the first node may also send configuration information to the IAB node, where the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Therefore, the IAB node can determine the protection parameters for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Wherein, the superior node or the host node can respectively configure the hypothetical resource type of the start symbol of the flexible resource and the hypothetical resource type of the end symbol of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the IAB node when the first node is the IAB node itself, after the IAB node determines the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU, it can also report the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node. Protection parameters for switching.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a resource determination device.
  • the description of the method in this application also applies to the device part.
  • the resource determination device can be specifically used to implement the method executed by the first node in the embodiments of FIG. 15 to FIG. 19.
  • the device may be the first node itself, or the chip or chipset in the first node or the chip used in the chip. Perform part of the function of the related method, where the first node can be an IAB node, or an upper node or host node of the IAB node.
  • the structure of the device may be as shown in FIG. 21, including a processing unit 2101 and a storage unit 2102. among them:
  • the storage unit 2102 is used to store code instructions
  • the processing unit 2101 is used to call the code stored in the storage unit 2102 to execute:
  • the multiple sets of time-domain positions of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time-domain position of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the resource of the DU resource Properties, dynamic resource indication information of the DU, and first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT, where the second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information;
  • the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource
  • the protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource
  • the symbol index information It is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
  • the second information is reception configuration information, or the second information is cell group information
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT downlink resource
  • the protection parameter is the DU resource and the MT downlink resource
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
  • the second information is receiving configuration information, and the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  • the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information of the control resource settings configured by the MT, or the receiving configuration information is The reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH where the MT is configured.
  • the second information is the transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information;
  • the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the protection parameter is the difference between the DU resource and the MT.
  • the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT.
  • the second information is sending configuration information
  • the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  • the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured by the MT, or the sending configuration The information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
  • the resource determining apparatus is deployed in a communication device, or the resource determining apparatus is deployed in an upper node or a host node of the communication device.
  • the device for determining the resource if the device for determining the resource is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, the device further includes: a transceiving unit 2103, configured to receive indication information reported by the communication device, and the indication information is used to indicate multiple MTs. The first information corresponding to each second information in the second information;
  • the processing unit 2101 is further configured to determine the first information corresponding to each second information among the multiple second information of the MT.
  • the device for determining the resource if the device for determining the resource is deployed in a communication device, the device further includes: a transceiver unit 2103, configured to report indication information to the second node, and the indication information is used to indicate each of the plurality of second information of the MT.
  • the first information corresponding to the second information, and the second node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a protection parameter determination device.
  • the protection parameter determination device may be specifically used to implement the method executed by the first node in the embodiment of FIG. 20.
  • the device may be the first node itself, or the chip or chipset in the first node or the chip used to perform related Part of the method function, where the first node can be an IAB node, or an upper node or host node of the IAB node.
  • the structure of the device may be as shown in FIG. 22, including a processing unit 2201 and a storage unit 2202. among them:
  • the storage unit 2202 is used to store code instructions
  • the processing unit 2201 is used to call the code stored in the storage unit 2202 to execute:
  • the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter.
  • the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU.
  • the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU;
  • the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information.
  • the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter
  • the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum or minimum of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter. value.
  • the first information includes the first protection parameter
  • the processing unit 2201 is further configured to determine that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is uplink before determining the first information;
  • the method for the processing unit 2201 to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically: determining the first protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the first information includes the second protection parameter
  • the processing unit 2201 is further configured to determine that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is downlink before determining the first information
  • the method for the processing unit 2201 to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically: determining the second protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
  • the transceiver unit 2203 is configured to receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
  • the transceiver unit 2203 is configured to report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
  • the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
  • the transceiver unit 2203 is configured to report the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
  • the protection parameter determination device is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, and the device further includes:
  • the transceiver unit 2203 is configured to send configuration information to the communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  • the protection parameter determination device is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, and the device further includes:
  • the transceiver unit 2203 is configured to receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device.
  • the division of units in the embodiments of this application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit. In the device, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It can be understood that, for the function or implementation of each unit in the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the related description of the method embodiment.
  • the device for determining resources may be as shown in FIG. 23.
  • the device may be the first node or a chip in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper-level node of the communication device. Or host node.
  • the device may include a processor 2301, a communication interface 2302, and a memory 2303.
  • the processing unit 2101 may be a processor 2301.
  • the transceiver unit 2103 may be a communication interface 2302.
  • the processor 2301 may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or a digital processing unit, and so on.
  • the communication interface 2302 may be a transceiver, an interface circuit such as a transceiver circuit, etc., or a transceiver chip, and so on.
  • the device also includes a memory 2303, which is used to store a program executed by the processor 2301.
  • the memory 2303 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory, such as random access memory (random access memory). -access memory, RAM).
  • the memory 2303 is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the processor 2301 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2303, and is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned processing unit 2101, which will not be repeated here in this application.
  • the communication interface 2302 is specifically configured to perform the actions of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 2103, which will not be repeated in this application.
  • the memory 2303 is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned storage unit 2102, and details are not described herein again in this application.
  • connection medium between the aforementioned communication interface 2302, the processor 2301, and the memory 2303 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 2303, the processor 2301, and the communication interface 2302 are connected by a bus 2304.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 23.
  • the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 23 to represent it, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the protection parameter determination device may be as shown in FIG. 24, and the device may be the first node or a chip in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper level of the communication device. Node or host node.
  • the device may include a processor 2401, a communication interface 2402, and a memory 2403.
  • the processing unit 2201 may be a processor 2401.
  • the transceiving unit 2203 may be a communication interface 2402.
  • the processor 2401 may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or a digital processing unit, and so on.
  • the communication interface 2402 may be a transceiver, an interface circuit such as a transceiver circuit, etc., or a transceiver chip, and so on.
  • the device also includes a memory 2403, which is used to store a program executed by the processor 2401.
  • the memory 2403 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory, such as random access memory (random access memory). -access memory, RAM).
  • the memory 2403 is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the processor 2401 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2403, and is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned processing unit 2201, which will not be repeated in this application.
  • the communication interface 2402 is specifically configured to perform the actions of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 2203, which will not be repeated in this application.
  • the memory 2403 is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned storage unit 2202, and details are not described herein again in this application.
  • connection medium between the aforementioned communication interface 2402, the processor 2401, and the memory 2403 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 2403, the processor 2401, and the communication interface 2402 are connected by a bus 2404.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 24.
  • the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of presentation, only a thick line is used in Figure 24 to represent it, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the embodiment of the present invention also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer software instructions required to be executed to execute the foregoing processor, which contains a program required to execute the foregoing processor.
  • the embodiment of the present invention also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product runs on a processor, the method flow of the above method embodiment is realized.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application disclose a resource determination method, the method comprises: determining a time-domain position of a distribution unit (DU) resource of a communication device; determining a multi-set time-domain position of a mobile terminal (MT) of the communication device, wherein the multi-set time-domain position of the MT is related to one or more of the following information: the time-domain position, resource type, resource property, dynamic resource indication information of the DU resource, and first information corresponding to each of a plurality of second information of the MT, the second information comprises receiving configuration information, transmitting configuration information or cell group information; and the first information comprises time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information. Hence, the implementation of the embodiments of the present application can accurately determine the time-domain position of a backhaul link on the basis of receiving configuration information, transmitting configuration information or cell group information of the MT.

Description

一种资源确定方法及装置Method and device for determining resource
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2019年09月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910944792.0、申请名称为“一种资源确定方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。本申请还要求在2019年11月01日提交中国专利局、申请号为201911061070.7、申请名称为“一种资源确定方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其部分内容通过引用结合在本申请中。本申请还要求在2020年05月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010444159.8、申请名称为“一种资源确定方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on September 30, 2019, the application number is 201910944792.0, and the application name is "a resource determination method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference . This application also requires the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201911061070.7, and the application name is "a resource determination method and device" on November 1, 2019. Part of the content is incorporated into this application by reference. in. This application also requires the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 202010444159.8, and the application name is "a resource determination method and device" on May 22, 2020, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference in.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种资源确定方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method and device for determining resources.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动通信技术的不断发展,频谱资源日趋紧张。为了提高频谱利用率,未来的基站部署将会更加密集。此外,密集部署还可以避免覆盖空洞的出现。在传统蜂窝网络架构下,基站通过光纤与核心网建立连接。然而在很多场景下,光纤的部署成本非常高昂。中继节点(relay node,RN)通过无线回传链路与核心网建立连接,可节省部分光纤部署成本。With the continuous development of mobile communication technology, spectrum resources are becoming increasingly scarce. In order to improve spectrum utilization, future base station deployment will be more intensive. In addition, dense deployment can also avoid the appearance of coverage holes. Under the traditional cellular network architecture, the base station establishes a connection with the core network through optical fiber. However, in many scenarios, the deployment cost of optical fiber is very high. The relay node (RN) establishes a connection with the core network through a wireless backhaul link, which can save part of the fiber deployment cost.
一般情况下,中继节点与一个或多个上级节点建立无线回传链路,并通过上级节点接入核心网。上级节点可通过多种信令对中继节点进行一定的控制(例如,数据调度、定时调制、功率控制等)。另外,中继节点可为多个下级节点提供服务。中继节点的上级节点可以是基站,也可以是另一个中继节点。中继节点的下级节点可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE),也可以是另一个中继节点。在某些情形下,上级节点也可以称为上游节点,下级节点也可以称为下游节点。Generally, the relay node establishes a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and accesses the core network through the upper-level nodes. The upper-level node can perform certain control (for example, data scheduling, timing modulation, power control, etc.) on the relay node through a variety of signaling. In addition, the relay node can provide services for multiple subordinate nodes. The superior node of the relay node can be a base station or another relay node. The lower-level node of the relay node may be a user equipment (UE) or another relay node. In some cases, the upper-level node may also be called the upstream node, and the lower-level node may also be called the downstream node.
带内中继是回传链路与接入链路共享相同频段的中继方案,由于没有使用额外的频谱资源,带内中继具有频谱效率高及部署成本低等优点。带内中继一般具有半双工的约束,具体地,中继节点在接收其上级节点发送的下行信号时不能向其下级节点发送下行信号,而中继节点在接收其下级节点发送的上行信号时不能向其上级节点发送上行信号。新一代无线通信系统(new radio,NR)的带内中继方案被称为一体化接入回传(integrated access and backhaul,IAB),而中继节点被称为IAB节点。In-band relay is a relay solution in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, the in-band relay has the advantages of high spectrum efficiency and low deployment cost. In-band relay generally has a half-duplex constraint. Specifically, a relay node cannot send a downlink signal to its lower-level node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its upper-level node, while a relay node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its lower-level node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its superior node. The in-band relay solution of the new generation wireless communication system (new radio, NR) is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node.
在IAB节点正常工作时,接入链路(与下属UE通信的链路)与回传链路(与上级节点通信的链路)以时分,空分或频分的方式进行资源复用。以时分复用(Time division multiplexing,TDM)场景为例,回传链路与接入链路在不同的时刻工作,因此IAB节点需要在回传链路的收发与接入链路的收发之间切换。为了提高回传链路与接入链路的资源利用率,IAB节点需要确定回传链路和接入链路可用符号集合。为了提高回传链路与接入链路的资源利用率,IAB节点需要确定回传链路和接入链路的时域位置。如何确定回传链路的时域位置是目前亟待解 决的问题。When the IAB node is working normally, the access link (the link that communicates with the subordinate UE) and the backhaul link (the link that communicates with the upper-level node) perform resource multiplexing in a time division, space division, or frequency division manner. Take the time division multiplexing (TDM) scenario as an example. The backhaul link and the access link work at different times. Therefore, the IAB node needs to be between the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the transmission and reception of the access link. Switch. In order to improve the resource utilization of the backhaul link and the access link, the IAB node needs to determine the set of available symbols for the backhaul link and the access link. In order to improve the resource utilization of the backhaul link and the access link, the IAB node needs to determine the time domain position of the backhaul link and the access link. How to determine the time domain position of the backhaul link is a problem that needs to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种资源确定方法及装置,能够准确地确定出回传链路的时域位置。The embodiments of the present application provide a resource determination method and device, which can accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种资源确定方法,该方法包括:第一节点确定通信设备的分布单元DU资源的时域位置;第一节点确定通信设备的移动终端MT的多套时域位置,MT的多套时域位置与以下信息中的一项或多项有关:DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的资源性质、DU的动态资源指示信息、MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息,该第二信息包括接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息;其中,该第一信息包括时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息,该时间差为DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差,该保护参数为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数,该符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,该符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的结束符号的索引。本申请实施例能够基于MT的接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息准确地确定出MT的多套时域位置,进而准确地确定出回传链路的时域位置。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a resource. The method includes: a first node determines a time domain position of a resource of a distribution unit DU of a communication device; and the first node determines multiple sets of time of a mobile terminal MT of the communication device. Domain location, multiple sets of time domain locations of MT are related to one or more of the following information: time domain location of DU resource, resource type of DU resource, resource nature of DU resource, DU dynamic resource indication information, MT’s The first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information, the second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information; wherein, the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information, and The time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, the protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index The information is the index of the end symbol of the available resources of the MT. The embodiments of the present application can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT based on the MT's receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information, and then accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息,或者,第二信息为小区组信息,上述时间差为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差,上述保护参数为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,上述符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,上述符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, the second information is receiving configuration information, or the second information is cell group information, the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, and the protection parameter is the difference between the DU resource and the MT. For protection parameters for switching between downlink resources, the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
在该可能的实现中,第一节点可基于多个小区组信息(或接收配置信息)中各个小区组信息(或接收配置信息)对应的第一信息,确定MT的多套下行时域位置。也就是说,第一节点可以针对不同的小区组信息(或接收配置信息)确定MT的不同下行时域位置。In this possible implementation, the first node may determine multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information (or received configuration information) in the multiple cell group information (or received configuration information). That is, the first node can determine different downlink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information (or receiving configuration information).
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息,MT的多个第二信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。基于该可能的实现方式,能够针对不同的小区组信息确定MT的不同时域位置,并可针对同一小区组信息中的不同接收配置信息确定MT的不同时域位置。In a possible implementation, the second information is receiving configuration information, and the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT. Based on this possible implementation manner, different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different cell group information, and different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different reception configuration information in the same cell group information.
在一种可能的实现中,接收配置信息为通信设备的上级节点为MT配置的的接收配置信息,或者,接收配置信息为MT被配置的控制资源设置的接收配置信息,或者,接收配置信息为MT被配置的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的接收配置信息。In a possible implementation, the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information of the control resource settings configured by the MT, or the receiving configuration information is The reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH where the MT is configured.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为MT的发送配置信息,或者,第二信息为小区组信息;上述时间差为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差,上述保护参数为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,上述符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,上述符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, the second information is the transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information; the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the protection parameter is the DU resource and the MT uplink resource. For the protection parameters for switching between the uplink resources of the MT, the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the uplink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resource of the MT.
在该可能的实现中,第一节点可基于多个小区组信息(或发送配置信息)中各个小区组信息(或发送配置信息)对应的第一信息,确定MT的多套上行时域位置。也就是说,第一节点可以针对不同的小区组信息(或发送配置信息)确定MT的不同上行时域位置。In this possible implementation, the first node may determine multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information (or sending configuration information) in the multiple cell group information (or sending configuration information). That is, the first node can determine different uplink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information (or sending configuration information).
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为发送配置信息,MT的多个第二信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。基于该可能的实现方式,能够针对不同的小区组信息可确定MT的不同时域位置,并可针对同一小区组信息中的不同发送配置信息确定MT的不同时域位置。In a possible implementation, the second information is sending configuration information, and the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT. Based on this possible implementation manner, different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different cell group information, and different time domain positions of the MT can be determined for different transmission configuration information in the same cell group information.
在一种可能的实现中,发送配置信息为通信设备的上级节点为MT配置的的发送配置信息,或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的物理上行控制信道PUCCH的发送配置信息,或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的探测参考信号SRS传输的发送配置信息。In a possible implementation, the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured by the MT, or the sending configuration The information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备,或者,第一节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。In a possible implementation, the first node is a communication device, or the first node is an upper node or host node of the communication device.
在一种可能的实现中,若第一节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,第一节点还可接收通信设备上报的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。基于该可选的实现,通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点能够根据MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息准确地确定MT的多套时域位置。In a possible implementation, if the first node is the superior node or host node of the communication device, the first node may also receive the indication information reported by the communication device, and the indication information is used to indicate each of the multiple second messages of the MT The first information corresponding to the second information. Based on this optional implementation, the upper-level node or host node of the communication device can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,若第一节点为通信设备,第一节点还可确定MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。In a possible implementation, if the first node is a communication device, the first node may also determine the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,若第一节点为通信设备,在第一节点确定多个第一信息之后,还可向第二节点上报指示信息,该指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息,该第二节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。基于该可选的实现,通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点能够根据MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息准确地确定MT的多套时域位置。In a possible implementation, if the first node is a communication device, after the first node determines multiple pieces of first information, it may also report indication information to the second node. The indication information is used to indicate multiple second pieces of the MT. The first information corresponding to each second information in the information, and the second node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device. Based on this optional implementation, the upper-level node or host node of the communication device can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种保护参数确定方法,应用于第一节点,该方法包括:确定第一信息,该第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数,第一保护参数为通信设备的移动终端MT资源与分布单元DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数;根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数,其中,所述灵活资源包括用于上行的资源、用于下行的资源。基于该实施方式,能够准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining protection parameters, applied to a first node, and the method includes: determining first information, where the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter, The first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU; and the MT resource is determined according to the first information. The flexible resource of the DU is a protection parameter for switching, where the flexible resource includes a resource used for uplink and a resource used for downlink. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources can be accurately determined.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第一保护参数和第二保护参数,MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为第一保护参数和第二保护参数中的最大值或最小值。基于该实施方式,能够准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum or minimum of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter. value. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources can be accurately determined.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第一保护参数,确定第一信息之前,还可确定DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为上行;根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的具体实施方式为:确定第一保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。基于该实施方式,能够基于DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first information includes the first protection parameter. Before the first information is determined, the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can also be determined to be uplink; the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information. The specific implementation of the switching protection parameter is: determining the first protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the DU flexible resource can be accurately determined based on the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第二保护参数,确定第一信息之前,还可确定DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为下行;根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的具体实施方式为:确定第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。基于该实施方式,能够基于DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first information includes the second protection parameter. Before the first information is determined, the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can also be determined to be downlink; the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information. The specific implementation of the switching protection parameter is: determining the second protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this implementation manner, the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the DU flexible resource can be accurately determined based on the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备,还可接收第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点发送的配置信息,该配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。基于该可能的实现,第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点可为第一节点配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型,从而第一节点根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型就能准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first node is a communication device, and can also receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the first node, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this possible implementation, the superior node or host node of the first node can configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU for the first node, so that the first node can accurately determine the MT based on the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. The protection parameter for switching between the resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备,向上级节点或宿主节点上报DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型可由第一节点自己假设的。因此,基于该可能的实现,第一节点能够将DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型上报至上级节点或宿主节点, 从而上级节点或宿主节点可根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first node is a communication device, and reports the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node. The hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can be assumed by the first node itself. Therefore, based on this possible implementation, the first node can report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node, so that the superior node or the host node can accurately determine the MT based on the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. The protection parameter for switching between the resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备,第一节点还可向上级节点或宿主节点上报MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。在该可能的实现中,上级节点或宿主节点可得到第一节点上报的MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数,从而上级节点或宿主节点可根据保护参数推导MT的时域位置,进而根据MT的时域位置进行合理地资源调度,避免资源冲突。In a possible implementation, the first node is a communication device, and the first node may also report a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node. In this possible implementation, the upper-level node or the host node can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource reported by the first node and the flexible resource of the DU, so that the upper-level node or the host node can deduce the time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameters, and then According to the time domain position of the MT, resource scheduling is performed reasonably to avoid resource conflicts.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,向通信设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。基于该可能的实现,通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点能够为通信设备配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型,从而通信设备根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型能够准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device, and sends configuration information to the communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Based on this possible implementation, the superior node or host node of the communication device can configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU for the communication device, so that the communication device can accurately determine the MT resource and the hypothetical resource type of the DU according to the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Protection parameters for flexible resource switching.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,第一节点还可接收通信设备上报的DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。在该可能的实现中,上级节点或宿主节点可得到第一节点上报的MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数,从而上级节点或宿主节点可根据保护参数推导MT的时域位置,进而根据MT的时域位置进行合理地资源调度,避免资源冲突。In a possible implementation, the first node is an upper node or host node of the communication device, and the first node may also receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device. In this possible implementation, the upper-level node or the host node can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource reported by the first node and the flexible resource of the DU, so that the upper-level node or the host node can deduce the time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameters, and then According to the time domain position of the MT, resource scheduling is performed reasonably to avoid resource conflicts.
第三方面,提供了一种资源确定装置,该装置可以是第一节点,也可以是第一节点内的芯片或芯片组,其中,第一节点可以为通信设备也可以是通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点。其中,该资源确定装置还可以为芯片系统。该资源确定装置可执行第一方面所述的方法。该资源确定装置的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。该单元可以是软件和/或硬件。该资源确定装置执行的操作及有益效果可以参见上述第一方面所述的方法以及有益效果,重复之处不再赘述。In a third aspect, a device for determining a resource is provided. The device may be a first node, or a chip or chipset in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper-level node of the communication device Or host node. Wherein, the resource determining device may also be a chip system. The resource determining device can perform the method described in the first aspect. The function of the resource determining device can be realized by hardware, or can be realized by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions. The unit can be software and/or hardware. For operations and beneficial effects performed by the resource determining device, reference may be made to the method and beneficial effects described in the first aspect above, and repetitions are not repeated here.
第四方面,提供了一种保护参数确定装置,该装置可以是第一节点,也可以是第一节点内的芯片或芯片组,其中,第一节点可以为通信设备也可以是通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点。其中,该保护参数确定装置还可以为芯片系统。该保护参数确定装置可执行第二方面所述的方法。该保护参数确定装置的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。该单元可以是软件和/或硬件。该保护参数确定装置执行的操作及有益效果可以参见上述第二方面所述的方法以及有益效果,重复之处不再赘述。In a fourth aspect, a device for determining protection parameters is provided. The device may be a first node, or a chip or chipset in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper level of the communication device Node or host node. Wherein, the protection parameter determination device may also be a chip system. The protection parameter determination device can execute the method described in the second aspect. The function of the protection parameter determination device can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions. The unit can be software and/or hardware. For the operations and beneficial effects performed by the protection parameter determination device, reference may be made to the method and beneficial effects described in the second aspect above, and the repetition will not be repeated.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种资源确定装置,所述资源确定装置包括包括通信接口和处理器,所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信,例如数据或信号的收发。示例性的,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。处理器用于调用一组程序、指令或数据,执行上述第一方面描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储处理器调用的程序、指令或数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的、指令或数据时,可以实现上述第一方面描述的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a resource determining device. The resource determining device includes a communication interface and a processor. The communication interface is used for communication between the device and other devices, for example, data or signal transmission and reception. Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface. The processor is used to call a set of programs, instructions or data to execute the method described in the first aspect. The device may also include a memory for storing programs, instructions or data called by the processor. The memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes instructions or data stored in the memory, the method described in the first aspect can be implemented.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种保护参数确定装置,所述保护参数确定装置包括包括通信接口和处理器,所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信,例如数据或信号的收发。示例性的,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。处理器用于调用一组程序、指令或数据,执行上述第二方面描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括存储器, 用于存储处理器调用的程序、指令或数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的、指令或数据时,可以实现上述第二方面描述的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a protection parameter determination device. The protection parameter determination device includes a communication interface and a processor. The communication interface is used for communication between the device and other devices, such as data or signal transmission and reception. . Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface. The processor is used to call a set of programs, instructions or data to execute the method described in the second aspect above. The device may also include a memory for storing programs, instructions or data called by the processor. The memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes instructions or data stored in the memory, the method described in the second aspect can be implemented.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, configured to implement the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储指令,当所述指令被执行时,使得第一方面或第二方面所述的方法被实现。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store instructions, and when the instructions are executed, the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect is achieve.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,当所述指令被执行时,使得第一方面或第二方面所述的方法被实现。In a ninth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product including instructions, which when executed, enable the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect to be implemented.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信信号,包括第一节点和第二节点,其中,第一节点为第二节点的上级节点,所述第二节点如第三方面或第四方面所述的装置。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication signal, including a first node and a second node, where the first node is an upper-level node of the second node, and the second node is as described in the third aspect or the fourth aspect. Mentioned device.
本申请实施例能够基于MT的接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息准确地确定出MT的多套时域位置,进而准确地确定出回传链路的时域位置。The embodiments of the present application can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT based on the MT's receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information, and then accurately determine the time domain position of the backhaul link.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种IAB系统的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种回传链路、接入链路的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a backhaul link and an access link provided by an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的架构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种IAB节点通信的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of IAB node communication provided by an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种IAB节点的结构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB node provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种MT资源和DU资源的关系示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a relationship between MT resources and DU resources provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种MT符号和DU符号之间的时间差的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT symbol and a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种MT帧和DU帧之间的时间差的示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT frame and a DU frame according to an embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种DU符号前后保护符号的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of the application; FIG.
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种DU符号前后保护符号的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种DU符号前后保护符号的示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种DU符号前后保护符号的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of the application; FIG.
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种DU符号前后保护符号的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of protection symbols before and after a DU symbol provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14A为本申请实施例提供的一种DU资源和DU资源的示意图;14A is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14B为本申请实施例提供的一种DU资源和DU资源的示意图;FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种资源确定方法的流程示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a resource provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种DU资源和DU资源的示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种MT帧和DU帧之间的时间差的示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a time difference between an MT frame and a DU frame according to an embodiment of this application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种DU资源和DU资源的示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种DU资源和DU资源的示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a DU resource and a DU resource provided by an embodiment of this application;
图20是本申请实施例提供的一种保护参数确定方法的流程示意图;20 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining protection parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21是本申请实施例提供的一种资源确定装置的结构示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a resource determining apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图22是本申请实施例提供的另一种保护参数确定装置的结构示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of another protection parameter determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图23是本申请实施例提供的一种资源确定装置的结构示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a resource determining apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图24是本申请实施例提供的另一种保护参数确定装置的结构示意图。FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of another protection parameter determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面结合附图对本申请具体实施例作进一步的详细描述。The specific embodiments of the present application will be described in further detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
带内中继是回传链路与接入链路共享相同频段的中继方案,由于没有使用额外的频谱资源,带内中继具有频谱效率高及部署成本低等优点。带内中继一般具有半双工的约束,具体地,中继节点在接收其上级节点发送的下行信号时不能向其下级节点发送下行信号,而中继节点在接收其下级节点发送的上行信号时不能向其上级节点发送上行信号。新一代无线通信系统(new radio,NR)的带内中继方案被称为一体化接入回传(integrated access and backhaul,IAB),而中继节点被称为IAB节点(IAB node)。In-band relay is a relay solution in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, the in-band relay has the advantages of high spectrum efficiency and low deployment cost. In-band relay generally has a half-duplex constraint. Specifically, a relay node cannot send a downlink signal to its lower-level node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its upper-level node, while a relay node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its lower-level node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its superior node. The in-band relay solution of the new generation wireless communication system (new radio, NR) is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node (IAB node).
如图1所示,IAB节点为UE提供无线接入和接入业务的无线回传。IAB donor节点(IAB宿主节点)向IAB节点提供无线回传功能,并提供UE与核心网的接口。IAB节点通过无线回传链路连接到IAB donor节点,从而使IAB节点所服务的UE与核心网进行连接。As shown in Figure 1, the IAB node provides wireless access and wireless backhaul of access services for the UE. The IAB donor node (IAB host node) provides the wireless backhaul function to the IAB node and provides the interface between the UE and the core network. The IAB node is connected to the IAB donor node through a wireless backhaul link, so that the UE served by the IAB node is connected to the core network.
在IAB节点正常工作时,接入链路与回传链路以时分,空分或频分的方式进行资源复用。以时分复用场景(time-division multiplexing,TDM)为例,回传链路与接入链路在不同的时刻工作,因此IAB节点需要在回传链路的收发与接入链路的收发之间切换。当回传链路与接入链路无间隔切换时,即接入链路符号与回传链路符号连续时,IAB节点具有最高的资源利用率。然而在实现中,由于功放的开关时间,传输距离,非理想同步等各种因素,回传链路与接入链路不能实现无间隔切换。因此,为了提高回传链路与接入链路的资源利用率,IAB节点需要准确地确定回传链路和接入链路的可用符号集合。When the IAB node is working normally, the access link and the backhaul link perform resource multiplexing in a time division, space division or frequency division manner. Taking the time-division multiplexing (TDM) scenario as an example, the backhaul link and the access link work at different times. Therefore, the IAB node needs to perform the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the access link. Switch between. When the backhaul link and the access link are switched without interval, that is, when the access link symbol and the backhaul link symbol are continuous, the IAB node has the highest resource utilization rate. However, in implementation, due to various factors such as the switching time of the power amplifier, the transmission distance, and non-ideal synchronization, the backhaul link and the access link cannot be switched without interval. Therefore, in order to improve the resource utilization of the backhaul link and the access link, the IAB node needs to accurately determine the available symbol set of the backhaul link and the access link.
NR中的IAB节点可分为两部分,移动终端(mobile termination,MT)与分布单元(distributed unit,DU)。其中,MT用于IAB节点与上级节点通信,而DU用于IAB节点与下级节点通信,其中,上级节点可以是普通基站(如gNB),也可以是另外的IAB节点;下级节点可以是UE,也可以是另外的IAB节点。The IAB node in NR can be divided into two parts, a mobile terminal (MT) and a distributed unit (DU). Among them, MT is used for IAB nodes to communicate with upper-level nodes, and DU is used for IAB nodes to communicate with lower-level nodes. The upper-level node can be a common base station (such as gNB) or another IAB node; and the lower-level node can be a UE. It can also be another IAB node.
MT与上级节点通信的链路被称为上级回传链路(parent BH link),DU与下级IAB节点通信的链路被称为下级回传链路(child BH link),而DU与下属UE通信的链路被称为接入链路(access link)。其中,上级回传链路包括上级回传上行链路(uplink,UL)以及上级回传下行链路(downlink,DL),下级回传链路包括下级回传UL和下级回传DL,接入链路包括接入UL和接入DL,如图2所示。在一些情况下,下级回传链路也被称为接入链路。The link between the MT and the upper-level node is called the parent BH link, the link between the DU and the lower-level IAB node is called the child BH link, and the DU and the subordinate UE The communication link is called an access link. Among them, the upper-level backhaul link includes the upper-level backhaul uplink (uplink, UL) and the upper-level backhaul downlink (downlink, DL), and the lower-level backhaul link includes the lower-level backhaul UL and the lower-level backhaul DL. The link includes access to UL and access to DL, as shown in Figure 2. In some cases, the lower-level backhaul link is also called an access link.
首先,介绍NR IAB资源分配的现有结论:First, introduce the existing conclusions of NR IAB resource allocation:
MT资源:IAB节点的MT资源根据传输方向可被配置为下行(downlink,D),上行(uplink,U),灵活(Flexible,F)三种类型。这三种资源类型也是现有UE所支持的,因此可用现有信令指示。MT的上行资源始终用于上行传输,MT的下行资源始终用于下行传输,MT的灵活资源指该灵活资源可以在信令的配置下指示为用于上行传输或者下行传输。MT resource: The MT resource of the IAB node can be configured as downlink (D), uplink (U), and flexible (Flexible, F) according to the transmission direction. These three resource types are also supported by existing UEs, so they can be indicated by existing signaling. The uplink resource of the MT is always used for uplink transmission, the downlink resource of the MT is always used for downlink transmission, and the flexible resource of the MT means that the flexible resource can be indicated as being used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission under the configuration of signaling.
DU资源:IAB节点的DU资源包括上行,下行,灵活三种类型。其中,DU的上行资源始终用于上行传输,DU的下行资源始终用于下行传输,DU的灵活资源指该资源可以用于上行传输或者下行传输。DU resource: The DU resource of the IAB node includes three types: uplink, downlink, and flexible. Among them, the uplink resource of the DU is always used for uplink transmission, the downlink resource of the DU is always used for downlink transmission, and the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
进一步的,DU的上行,下行和灵活资源还可根据资源调度情况分为硬(hard,H)和软(soft,S)两种性质。Further, the uplink, downlink and flexible resources of the DU can also be classified into two types: hard (hard, H) and soft (soft, S) according to resource scheduling conditions.
DU hard资源:表示DU始终可用的资源。DU hard resource: indicates the resource that DU is always available.
DU soft资源:DU是否可用,依赖于上级节点的指示。DU soft resource: Whether the DU is available depends on the instructions of the superior node.
此外,DU还可包括不可用(Null)资源。In addition, the DU may also include Null resources.
综上,IAB节点的MT资源具有3种资源类型(即基于传输方向的三种类型:D/U/F),而DU资源具有7种资源类型(即三种资源类型(D/U/F)与两种资源性质(H/F)的两两组合,共6种,还有一种资源类型N,共7种),MT资源的3种资源类型与DU资源的7种资源类型两两组合后,当MT资源与DU资源的复用方式为时分复用TDM时,DU和MT的所有可能资源组合的行为可以如表1所示。其中:In summary, the MT resource of the IAB node has 3 resource types (that is, three types based on the transmission direction: D/U/F), and the DU resource has 7 resource types (that is, three resource types (D/U/F) ) And two resource types (H/F), a total of 6 types, and a resource type N, a total of 7 types), 3 resource types of MT resources and 7 resource types of DU resources Later, when the multiplexing mode of MT resource and DU resource is time division multiplexing TDM, the behavior of all possible resource combinations of DU and MT can be as shown in Table 1. among them:
-“MT:Tx”表示MT在被调度后应进行传输;-"MT:Tx" means that the MT should transmit after being scheduled;
-“DU:Tx”表示DU可能进行传输;-"DU:Tx" indicates that DU may be transmitted;
-“MT:Rx”表示MT有能力进行接收(如果有信号需要接收);-"MT: Rx" means that the MT is capable of receiving (if there is a signal that needs to be received);
-“DU:Rx”表示DU可能调度下级节点的上行传输;-"DU:Rx" indicates that DU may schedule the uplink transmission of the lower node;
-“MT:Tx/Rx”表示MT在被调度后应传输或接收,但传输和接收不同时发生;-"MT: Tx/Rx" means that the MT should transmit or receive after being scheduled, but the transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;
-“DU:Tx/Rx”表示DU可能进行传输或接收下级节点的传输,但传输和接收不同时发生;-"DU:Tx/Rx" means that DU may transmit or receive transmission from lower-level nodes, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;
-“IA”表示DU资源被显式或隐式的指示为可用;-"IA" means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as available;
-“INA”表示DU资源被显式或隐式的指示为不可用;-"INA" means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as unavailable;
-“MT:NULL”表示MT不进行发送且不必具有接收能力;-"MT:NULL" means that the MT does not send and does not have to have the receiving capability;
-“DU:NULL”表示DU不进行发送且不接收下级节点的传输;-"DU:NULL" means that DU does not send and does not receive transmissions from lower-level nodes;
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000002
为了能够更好地理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请实施例可应用的通信系统进行说明。In order to better understand the embodiments of the present application, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application will be described below.
本申请实施例提供的资源确定方法可以应用于具有中继节点的无线通信系统,如图3所示。应理解,图3仅是一种示例性说明,并不对无线通信系统中包括的终端设备、中继设备的数量进行具体限定。在NR中,中继设备一般被称为IAB节点。在LTE中,中继设备一般被称为RN。The resource determination method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system with a relay node, as shown in FIG. 3. It should be understood that FIG. 3 is only an exemplary illustration, and does not specifically limit the number of terminal devices and relay devices included in the wireless communication system. In NR, the relay device is generally called an IAB node. In LTE, the relay device is generally called RN.
图3所示的通信系统可以是各类通信系统中,例如,可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)、窄带物联网(narrow band internet of things,NB-IoT)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),也可以是第五代(5G)通信系统,还可以是LTE与5G混合架构、也可以是5G新无线(new radio,NR)系统、全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication,GSM),移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统,以及未来通信发展中出现的新的通信系统等。The communication system shown in Figure 3 can be in various communication systems, for example, the Internet of Things (IoT), narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT), and long term evolution (long term evolution). , LTE), it can also be a fifth-generation (5G) communication system, it can also be a hybrid architecture of LTE and 5G, it can also be a 5G new radio (NR) system, a global system for mobile communication, GSM), mobile communication system (universal mobile telecommunications system, UMTS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA) system, and new communication systems that will appear in the development of future communications.
本申请实施例中的网络设备用于将终端接入到无线网络。网络设备可以称为基站,又可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备)。示例的,网络设备可以为下一代节点B(next-generation Node B,gNB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)等。The network device in the embodiment of the present application is used to connect the terminal to the wireless network. The network device may be called a base station, and may also be called a radio access network (RAN) node (or device). For example, the network equipment can be a next-generation Node B (gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), an evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), and a radio network controller (radio network controller). network controller, RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B) , HNB), baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), etc.
本申请实施例中,中继节点是一种具有转发功能的上述基站或者终端设备中的一种,也可以是一种独立的设备形态,还可以是一种车载设备、或者设置在移动物体上的装置。中继节点的名称可以是中继节点(RN),中继发送接收点(rTRP),IAB节点(IAB node)等;中继节点的上级节点可以是gNB(包括gNB-DU,gNB-CU等),也可以是另一个中继节点。IAB节点是中继节点的特定的名称,不对本申请的方案构成限定,本申请的IAB节点也可以被称为中继节点(relay node,RN)、传输接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)、中继发送接收点(relaying TRP)等。In the embodiments of the present application, the relay node is one of the aforementioned base stations or terminal devices with forwarding function, or it can be an independent device form, it can also be a vehicle-mounted device, or set on a mobile object. installation. The name of the relay node can be the relay node (RN), the relay transmission and reception point (rTRP), the IAB node (IAB node), etc.; the superior node of the relay node can be gNB (including gNB-DU, gNB-CU, etc.) ), it can also be another relay node. The IAB node is a specific name of the relay node, which does not limit the solution of this application. The IAB node of this application can also be called a relay node (RN) or a transmission and reception point (TRP) , Relay sending and receiving point (relaying TRP), etc.
中继设备,尤其是IAB节点,可以包括移动终端(mobile termination,MT)功能和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)功能。即IAB节点通过MT与上级节点进行通信,DU是IAB节点的基站功能模块,用于实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层的功能,主要负责调度、物理信号生成与发送,即IAB节点通过DU与下级节点和UE进行通信,如图4所示。IAB节点的MT与DU均具有完整的收发模块,且两者之间具有接口。但应注意,MT与DU为逻辑模块,在实际中,两者可以共享部分子模块,例如可共用收发天线,基带处理模块等,如图5所示。A relay device, especially an IAB node, may include a mobile terminal (MT) function and a distributed unit (DU) function. That is, the IAB node communicates with the superior node through the MT. The DU is the base station function module of the IAB node, which is used to implement the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical The function of the layer is mainly responsible for scheduling, physical signal generation and transmission, that is, the IAB node communicates with the lower-level node and UE through the DU, as shown in Figure 4. Both the MT and DU of the IAB node have a complete transceiver module, and there is an interface between the two. However, it should be noted that MT and DU are logic modules. In practice, the two can share some sub-modules, for example, they can share transceiver antennas, baseband processing modules, etc., as shown in Figure 5.
本申请实施例中涉及的终端设备,是用户侧的一种用于接收或发射信号的实体。终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。终端也可以是连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。终端可以通过无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信。终端也可以称为无线终端、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动 台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户设备(user device)、或用户装备(user equipment)等等。终端设备可以是移动终端,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端的计算机,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如,终端设备还可以是个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。常见的终端设备例如包括:手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器等,但本申请实施例不限于此。The terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present application is an entity on the user side for receiving or transmitting signals. The terminal device may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like. The terminal can also be other processing equipment connected to the wireless modem. The terminal can communicate with one or more core networks through a radio access network (RAN). The terminal can also be called a wireless terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, access point, Remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user equipment (user device), or user equipment (user equipment), etc. The terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or called a "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal. For example, it can be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, built-in computer or vehicle-mounted mobile device, which is connected with wireless The access network exchanges language and/or data. For example, the terminal device can also be a personal communication service (PCS) phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), and other equipment. Common terminal devices include, for example, mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., but this application is implemented Examples are not limited to this.
应理解,本申请实施例中“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一(项)个”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a、b和c,其中a、b、c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated object, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one (item)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item (item) or plural items (item). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c It can be single or multiple. In addition, it should be understood that in the description of this application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used for the purpose of distinguishing description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor can it be understood as indicating Or imply the order.
在介绍本申请实施例提供的资源确定方法之前,先介绍一种保护参数确定的方法,需要说明的是,本申请实施例提供的确定保护参数的方法以及资源确定方法可以作为两个方案单独实施,也可以结合起来作为一个方案进行实施,这里不做具体限定。本申请中以通信设备为IAB节点为例进行说明。Before introducing the resource determination method provided by the embodiment of this application, we first introduce a method for determining protection parameters. It should be noted that the method for determining protection parameters and the resource determination method provided by the embodiments of this application can be implemented as two separate solutions. , Can also be combined as a plan for implementation, and there is no specific limitation here. In this application, the communication device is an IAB node as an example for description.
本申请实施例中,保护参数为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数。DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数可以理解为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔(guard period)、DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号(guard symbol)的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。本申请实施例中“偏差”也可称为“偏移”。In the embodiment of the present application, the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between DU resources and MT resources. The protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources can be understood as the guard period for switching between DU resources and MT resources, and the number of guard symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource. The "deviation" in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as "offset".
DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔具体可以为:MT资源切换至DU资源的保护间隔,或DU资源切换至MT资源的保护间隔。MT资源切换至DU资源的保护间隔是指:该DU资源加切换时间与该MT资源的重叠时间,该切换时间为该MT资源切换至该DU资源所需的最短时间。DU资源切换至MT资源的保护间隔是指:该DU资源加切换时间与该MT资源的重叠时间,该切换时间为该DU资源切换至该MT资源所需的最短时间。The guard interval for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource may specifically be: the guard interval when the MT resource is switched to the DU resource, or the guard interval when the DU resource is switched to the MT resource. The guard interval for switching the MT resource to the DU resource refers to the overlap time of the DU resource plus the switching time and the MT resource, and the switching time is the shortest time required for the MT resource to switch to the DU resource. The guard interval for switching the DU resource to the MT resource refers to the overlap time between the DU resource plus the switching time and the MT resource, and the switching time is the shortest time required for the DU resource to switch to the MT resource.
DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:MT资源切换至DU资源的保护符号的数量,或DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号的数量。MT资源切换至DU资源的保护符号的数量是指:当一个特定方向(D/U/F)的DU资源进行传输时,其前特定方向(D/U/F)上MT资源不可用的符号的数量。DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号的数量是指:当一个特定方向(D/U/F)的DU资源进行传输时,其后特定方向(D/U/F)上MT资源不可用的符号。The number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching from MT resources to DU resources, or the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources. The number of protection symbols for switching MT resources to DU resources refers to the symbols whose MT resources are not available in the previous specific direction (D/U/F) when DU resources in a specific direction (D/U/F) are transmitted quantity. The number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources refers to the symbols whose MT resources are not available in a specific direction (D/U/F) when DU resources in a specific direction (D/U/F) are transmitted. .
DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从MT资源切换至DU资源的可用符号索引偏差,或,从DU资源切换至MT资源的可用符号索引偏差。从MT资源切换至DU资源的可用符号索引偏差是指:DU资源的起始符号(例如一段连续的DU可用符号中的第一个符号)的索引与MT资源的结束符号(例如一段连续的MT可用符号中的最后一个可用符号)的索引之间的偏差。从DU资源切换至MT资源的可用符号索引偏差是指:DU资源的结束符号(例如一段连续的DU可用符号中的最后一个符号)的索引与MT资源的起始符号(例如一段连续的MT可用符号中的第一个可用符号)的索引之间的偏差。在这里,DU的可用符号包括DU始终可用的符号,即DU的hard符号,还包括通过动态信令确定的DU可用符号,例如通过动态信令指示为可用的DU的soft符号。The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT resource to the DU resource, or the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU resource to the MT resource. The available symbol index deviation for switching from MT resource to DU resource refers to the index of the start symbol of the DU resource (for example, the first symbol in a continuous segment of DU available symbols) and the end symbol of the MT resource (for example, a continuous segment of MT). The deviation between the index of the last available symbol in the available symbols). The available symbol index deviation for switching from DU resource to MT resource refers to the index of the end symbol of the DU resource (for example, the last symbol in a continuous period of DU available symbols) and the start symbol of the MT resource (for example, a continuous period of MT available symbols). The deviation between the index of the first available symbol in the symbol). Here, the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
应理解,“MT资源”仅是IAB节点与该IAB节点的上级节点通信的传输资源的一种示例性命名,在实际应用中,IAB节点与该IAB节点的上级节点通信的传输资源也可以命名为其他,如X资源,若X资源可以用于IAB节点与该IAB节点的上级节点通信,可以将该X资源认为是本申请实施例涉及的MT资源。同样,“DU资源”仅是IAB节点与该IAB节点的下级节点通信的传输资源的一种示例性命名,在实际应用中,IAB节点与该IAB节点的下级节点通信的传输资源也可以命名为其他,如A资源,若A资源可以用于IAB节点与该IAB节点的下级节点通信,可以将该A资源认为是本申请实施例涉及的DU资源。It should be understood that "MT resource" is only an exemplary naming of the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the upper-level node of the IAB node. In practical applications, the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the upper-level node of the IAB node can also be named For others, such as X resources, if the X resources can be used for communication between the IAB node and the upper-level node of the IAB node, the X resources can be considered as the MT resources involved in the embodiment of the present application. Similarly, "DU resource" is only an exemplary naming of the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node. In practical applications, the transmission resource used by the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node can also be named Others, such as A resources, if the A resource can be used for the IAB node to communicate with the subordinate node of the IAB node, the A resource can be considered as the DU resource involved in the embodiment of the present application.
为了便于理解,下面先对IAB节点的MT和DU的资源配置进行一个简要的概述:For ease of understanding, the following first gives a brief overview of the resource configuration of the MT and DU of the IAB node:
IAB节点的MT资源的半静态类型配置(D/U/F)由IAB节点的donor节点或上级节点通过半静态信令配置,示例性的,半静态信令可以为无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令等。The semi-static type configuration (D/U/F) of the MT resource of the IAB node is configured by the donor node or the superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling. For example, the semi-static signaling can be radio resource control (radio resource control). , RRC) signaling, etc.
IAB节点的DU资源的半静态资源类型(D/U/F)由IAB节点的donor节点或上级节点通过半静态信令或接口消息配置,示例性的,接口消息可以为通过F1-AP接口传递的消息等。The semi-static resource type (D/U/F) of the DU resource of the IAB node is configured by the donor node or the superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling or interface messages. Illustratively, the interface message can be transmitted through the F1-AP interface News etc.
DU资源的性质(hard与soft)通过显式配置。即IAB节点的donor节点或上级节点通过半静态信令或接口消息将DU资源(D/U/F)配置为hard与soft两种性质。在此情况下,IAB节点的MT可用/不可用资源可由IAB节点的DU的hard/soft资源隐式导出。The nature of DU resources (hard and soft) is explicitly configured. That is, the donor node or superior node of the IAB node configures the DU resource (D/U/F) as hard and soft through semi-static signaling or interface messages. In this case, the MT available/unavailable resources of the IAB node can be implicitly derived from the hard/soft resources of the DU of the IAB node.
此外,DU的Null资源也是由IAB节点的donor节点或上级节点通过半静态信令或接口消息配置。In addition, the Null resource of the DU is also configured by the donor node or superior node of the IAB node through semi-static signaling or interface messages.
下面举例说明DU的hard/soft资源推导MT的可用/不可用资源的原理。首先考虑在TDM的情况下:The following is an example to illustrate the principle of DU's hard/soft resources to derive MT's available/unavailable resources. First consider in the case of TDM:
DU的hard资源具有如下定义:hard资源是DU始终可用的资源。即IAB节点始终可以在DU的hard资源上与下级节点进行通信,而不用考虑MT的调度配置情况。因此,DU的hard/soft资源与MT的可用/不可用资源的关系如图6所示。图6给出了7个时隙,其中,时隙0和6为DU的hard时隙,DU始终可使用。假设TDM复用,则对应的MT时隙为不可用时隙。图中的时隙1至5为DU的soft时隙,对应的MT应为可用时隙。The hard resource of the DU has the following definition: the hard resource is the resource that is always available to the DU. That is, the IAB node can always communicate with the lower-level nodes on the hard resources of the DU, regardless of the scheduling configuration of the MT. Therefore, the relationship between the hard/soft resources of the DU and the available/unavailable resources of the MT is shown in Figure 6. Figure 6 shows 7 time slots, among them, time slots 0 and 6 are hard time slots of the DU, and the DU can always be used. Assuming TDM multiplexing, the corresponding MT time slot is an unusable time slot. The time slots 1 to 5 in the figure are soft time slots of the DU, and the corresponding MT should be an available time slot.
应理解,通过上级节点的动态指示或调度,DU的soft资源的可用性会被确定,其中部分soft资源会被指示为可用。假设TDM复用,当soft资源被指示为可用时,其对应的MT资源被转换为不可用。因此,IAB节点在推导MT的可用/不可用资源时,还需要考虑动态资源指示或调度信令的结果。It should be understood that the availability of the soft resources of the DU will be determined through the dynamic indication or scheduling of the upper-level node, and some of the soft resources will be indicated as available. Assuming TDM multiplexing, when a soft resource is indicated as available, its corresponding MT resource is converted to unavailable. Therefore, when the IAB node derives the available/unavailable resources of the MT, it also needs to consider the result of dynamic resource indication or scheduling signaling.
在一种可能的实现中,当IAB节点的DU资源配置信息由donor节点配置时,上级节点也需要获取到DU资源配置信息,以确定MT的可用/不可用资源,从而避免调度冲突。在本 申请中,IAB节点的DU资源配置信息包括资源类型(D/U/F)信息和资源性质(H/S)信息。为了使上级节点获取到IAB节点的资源配置信息,donor节点可以将IAB节点的DU资源配置信息发送至上级节点的DU。在另一种可能的实现中,IAB节点向上级节点上报自身DU资源配置信息。IAB节点和其上级节点根据IAB节点的DU配置信息推导出IAB节点MT的可用资源和不可用资源,用以进行回传链路的传输。In a possible implementation, when the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node is configured by the donor node, the upper-level node also needs to obtain the DU resource configuration information to determine the available/unavailable resources of the MT, so as to avoid scheduling conflicts. In this application, the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node includes resource type (D/U/F) information and resource nature (H/S) information. In order for the superior node to obtain the resource configuration information of the IAB node, the donor node may send the DU resource configuration information of the IAB node to the DU of the superior node. In another possible implementation, the IAB node reports its own DU resource configuration information to the superior node. The IAB node and its superior node derive the available resources and unavailable resources of the IAB node MT according to the DU configuration information of the IAB node, so as to perform the transmission of the backhaul link.
应理解,上级节点在推导节点在IAB节点MT的可用/不可用资源时,也需要考虑动态资源指示或调度信令的结果。由于动态指示或调度一般由上级节点发送,因此上级节点可以获知动态指示或调度的结果。It should be understood that the superior node also needs to consider the result of dynamic resource indication or scheduling signaling when deriving the available/unavailable resources of the node in the IAB node MT. Since the dynamic indication or scheduling is generally sent by the upper-level node, the upper-level node can learn the result of the dynamic indication or scheduling.
一般来说,对MT的可用/不可用资源的推导具有以下原则:MT的接收或发送不影响DU对hard资源和/或被指示为可用的soft资源的使用。在这里,MT的接收或发送至少包括IAB节点MT对单播信号的接收或发送。Generally speaking, the derivation of the available/unavailable resources of the MT has the following principle: the reception or transmission of the MT does not affect the use of the hard resources and/or the soft resources indicated as available by the DU. Here, the reception or transmission of the MT includes at least the reception or transmission of the unicast signal by the IAB node MT.
图6给出的推导仅考虑了MT资源与DU资源的理想切换,在实际中,由于MT与DU资源的定时偏差以及IAB节点的切换时间等因素,MT资源与DU资源是非理想切换,即MT资源与DU资源切换时会引入部分保护符号,保护符号既不能用于MT传输,也不能用于DU传输。The derivation given in Figure 6 only considers the ideal switching between MT resources and DU resources. In practice, due to the timing deviation between MT and DU resources and the switching time of IAB nodes, the MT resources and DU resources are not ideally switched, that is, MT. When the resource and DU resource are switched, some protection symbols will be introduced. The protection symbols can neither be used for MT transmission, nor for DU transmission.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的保护参数确定的方法进行具体说明。The method for determining the protection parameters provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
在实际部署中,由于传播时延和非理想因素会导致MT符号和DU符号不是严格对齐的。因此,首先定义MT资源和DU资源的多个时间差,如图7所示:In actual deployment, due to propagation delay and non-ideal factors, the MT symbol and the DU symbol are not strictly aligned. Therefore, first define multiple time differences between MT resources and DU resources, as shown in Figure 7:
MT下行符号与DU下行符号的时间差(下面将其称为Δ DD)。一般情况下,MT的下行接收滞后于DU的下行发送,但不排除在一些场景下,MT的下行接收会提前于DU的下行发送。因此,Δ DD可能是有符号的值(即其可能是正数,也可能是负数),其具体的正负号要依赖于时间差的严格定义。在本申请实施例中,以MT下行接收滞后于DU下行发送的时间为例进行说明,并假设Δ DD>0。一般情况下,有Δ DD=T p+T e,其中,T p为IAB节点与上级节点的传输时延,T e包括了同步的非理想因素,例如包括了IAB节点DU与上级节点的定时误差。 The time difference between the MT downlink symbol and the DU downlink symbol (hereinafter referred to as Δ DD ). In general, the downlink reception of the MT lags behind the downlink transmission of the DU, but it is not ruled out that in some scenarios, the downlink reception of the MT may precede the downlink transmission of the DU. Therefore, Δ DD may be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference. In the embodiment of the present application, to MT downlink reception time lags DU downlink transmission as an example, and assuming Δ DD> 0. In general, there is Δ DD = T p + T e , where T p is the transmission delay between the IAB node and the upper-level node, and T e includes the non-ideal factors of synchronization, such as the timing of the IAB node DU and the upper-level node. error.
MT上行符号与DU上行符号的时间差(下面将其称为Δ UU)。一般情况下,MT的上行发送提前于DU的上行接收。但不排除在一些场景下,MT的上行发送会滞后于DU的上行接收。因此,Δ UU也可能是有符号的值(即其可能是正数,也可能是负数),其具体的正负号要依赖于时间差的严格定义。在本申请实施例中,以Δ UU为MT上行发送提前于DU的上行接收的时间为例进行说明,并假设Δ UU<0。一般情况下,有Δ UU=Δ DD+T g-TA,其中,T g为IAB节点DU的上行接收帧提前于DU的下行发送帧的时间,TA为IAB节点MT进行上行传输所采用的定时提前量。 The time difference between the MT uplink symbol and the DU uplink symbol (hereinafter referred to as Δ UU ). In general, the uplink transmission of the MT is ahead of the uplink reception of the DU. But it does not rule out that in some scenarios, the uplink transmission of the MT will lag behind the uplink reception of the DU. Therefore, Δ UU may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference. In the embodiment of the present application, ΔUU is the time when MT uplink transmission is ahead of DU uplink reception as an example for description, and ΔUU <0 is assumed. In general, Δ UU = Δ DD + T g -TA, where T g is the time when the uplink receiving frame of the IAB node DU is ahead of the DU downlink sending frame, and TA is the timing used by the IAB node MT for uplink transmission Advance amount.
MT下行符号与DU上行符号的时间差(下面将其称为Δ DU)。一般情况下,MT的下行接收滞后于DU的上行接收。但不排除在一些场景下,MT的下行接收会提前于DU的上行接收。因此,Δ DU也可能是有符号的值(即其可能是正数,也可能是负数),其具体的正负号要依赖于时间差的严格定义。在本申请实施例中,以Δ DU为MT的下行接收滞后于DU的上行接收的时间为例进行说明,并假设Δ DU>0。一般情况下,有Δ DU=Δ DD+T gThe time difference between the MT downlink symbol and the DU uplink symbol (hereinafter referred to as Δ DU ). In general, the downlink reception of the MT lags behind the uplink reception of the DU. But it does not rule out that in some scenarios, the downlink reception of the MT may be earlier than the uplink reception of the DU. Therefore, Δ DU may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference. In the embodiment of the present application, the time during which the downlink reception with Δ DU is MT lags behind the uplink reception of the DU is taken as an example for description, and it is assumed that Δ DU > 0. In general, there is Δ DUDD +T g .
MT上行符号与DU下行符号的时间差(下面将其称为Δ UD)。一般情况下,MT的上行发送提前于DU的下行发送。但不排除在一些场景下,MT的上行发送会滞后于DU的下行发送。因此,Δ UD也可能是有符号的值(即其可能是正数,也可能是负数),其具体的正负号要依赖于时间差的严格定义。在本申请实施例中,以Δ UD为MT上行发送提前于DU的上行接收的 时间为例进行说明,并假设Δ UD<0。一般情况下,有Δ UU=Δ DD-TA。 The time difference between the MT uplink symbol and the DU downlink symbol (hereinafter referred to as Δ UD ). Generally, the uplink transmission of MT is ahead of the downlink transmission of DU. But it does not rule out that in some scenarios, the uplink transmission of the MT will lag behind the downlink transmission of the DU. Therefore, Δ UD may also be a signed value (that is, it may be a positive number or a negative number), and its specific sign depends on the strict definition of the time difference. In the embodiment of the present application, ΔUD is the time when the MT uplink transmission is ahead of the DU uplink reception as an example for description, and it is assumed that ΔUD <0. In general, there is Δ UUDD -TA.
应注意,图7所示时间差是MT符号与DU符号的时间差,但协议中,MT资源与DU资源的时间差一般表示MT帧或子帧与DU的帧或子帧的时间差。以Δ DD为例进行说明,如图8所示,Δ DD表示了MT帧起始时间相对于DU帧起始时间的滞后量,即MT帧的起始时间减去对应DU帧的起始时间。应理解,Δ DD也可定义为DU帧的起始时间减去对应MT帧的起始时间。 It should be noted that the time difference shown in FIG. 7 is the time difference between the MT symbol and the DU symbol, but in the protocol, the time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource generally represents the time difference between the MT frame or subframe and the DU frame or subframe. Take Δ DD as an example for illustration. As shown in Figure 8, Δ DD represents the lag of the start time of the MT frame relative to the start time of the DU frame, that is, the start time of the MT frame minus the start time of the corresponding DU frame . It should be understood, Δ DD DU also be defined as the frame start time by subtracting the start time MT corresponding to the frame.
本申请实施例中MT资源和DU资源的时间差可以指MT符号与DU符号的时间差,也可以指MT帧和DU帧的时间差,或者,也可以指MT子帧与DU子帧的时间差,当然也可以是其他时间单位的时间差,这里不做具体限定。应注意,本申请实施例中的时间差也可称为时间偏差、时间偏移(time misalignment)等。The time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource in the embodiment of this application may refer to the time difference between the MT symbol and the DU symbol, the time difference between the MT frame and the DU frame, or the time difference between the MT subframe and the DU subframe, of course. It can be the time difference of other time units, which is not specifically limited here. It should be noted that the time difference in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as time offset, time misalignment, and so on.
此外,除了MT资源与DU资源的时间差,MT传输与DU传输之间的切换时间也是影响IAB节点资源复用的重要信息。MT传输与DU传输的切换时间主要包括发送至接收所需要的功放关闭时间(也就是发送至接收的切换时间)、接收至发送转换所需要的功放开启时间(也就是接收至发送的切换时间)、接收至接收转换的增益调节时间(也就是接收至接收的切换时间)或发送至发送转换的功率调节时间(也就是发送至发送的切换时间)。对于接收至接收的切换,当MT接收信号与DU的接收信号功率差别较小时,两者的切换时间可以忽略,而当两接收信号功率差别较大时,两者的切换时间可能较长。同理,对于发送至发送的切换,当MT的发射功率与DU的发射功率差别较小时,两者的切换时间可以忽略,而当两信号的发射功率差别较大时,两者的切换时间可能较长。应理解,上述各种切换所需要的时间是IAB节点已知的,而协议也可能定义各种切换所需要的最大值。In addition, in addition to the time difference between MT resources and DU resources, the switching time between MT transmission and DU transmission is also important information that affects IAB node resource reuse. The switching time between MT transmission and DU transmission mainly includes the power amplifier off time required for sending to receiving (that is, the switching time from sending to receiving), and the power amplifier on time required for the conversion from receiving to sending (that is, the switching time from receiving to sending). , The gain adjustment time of receiving to receiving conversion (that is, the switching time from receiving to receiving) or the power adjusting time of sending to sending conversion (that is, the switching time of sending to sending). For the switch from receiving to receiving, when the power difference between the received signal of the MT and the received signal of the DU is small, the switching time between the two can be ignored, and when the power difference between the two received signals is large, the switching time between the two may be longer. Similarly, for the switch from transmission to transmission, when the difference between the transmission power of the MT and the transmission power of the DU is small, the switching time between the two can be ignored, and when the transmission power of the two signals differ greatly, the switching time between the two may be Longer. It should be understood that the time required for the various handovers described above is known by the IAB node, and the protocol may also define the maximum value required for various handovers.
本申请实施例中,IAB节点确定保护参数时,可以根据DU资源和MT资源的时间差确定保护参数。例如,对于DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间的切换(即接收至接收的切换),当DU的接收信号与MT接收信号功率差别较小时,两者的切换时间可以忽略,可根据DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间的时间差,确定DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。再如,对于DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间的切换(即发送至发送的切换),当DU的发射信号与MT发射信号的功率差别较小时,两者的切换时间可以忽略,可根据DU下行资源与MT上行资源的时间差,确定DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。In the embodiment of the present application, when the IAB node determines the protection parameter, the protection parameter may be determined according to the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource. For example, for the handover between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources (that is, handover from reception to reception), when the power difference between the received signal of the DU and the received signal of the MT is small, the switching time between the two can be ignored. The time difference between the MT downlink resource and the MT downlink resource determines the protection parameters for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource. For another example, for the switching between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources (that is, the switching from transmission to transmission), when the power difference between the DU transmission signal and the MT transmission signal is small, the switching time between the two can be ignored. The time difference between the downlink resource and the MT uplink resource determines the protection parameters for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource.
或者,也可以根据DU资源和MT资源之间的时间差、DU资源和MT资源之间的切换时间,确定DU资源和MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数。对于发送与接收之间得到切换,例如,IAB节点在DU下行资源和MT下行资源之间切换时,可以根据DU下行资源和MT下行资源之间的时间差以及DU下行资源和MT下行资源之间的切换时间,确定DU下行资源和MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。IAB节点在DU上行资源和MT上行资源之间切换时,可以根据DU上行资源和MT上行资源之间的时间差以及DU上行资源和MT上行资源之间的切换时间,确定DU上行资源和MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。Alternatively, the protection parameters for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource can also be determined according to the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the switching time between the DU resource and the MT resource. For switching between sending and receiving, for example, when an IAB node switches between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources, it can be based on the time difference between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources and the difference between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources. The switching time determines the protection parameters for switching between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources. When the IAB node switches between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources, it can determine DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources according to the time difference between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources and the switching time between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources Protection parameters to switch between.
对于接收至接收的切换,例如,DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间的切换。当MT接收信号与DU的接收信号功率差别较大时,两者的切换时间不可以忽略,可根据DU上行资源与MT下行资源的时间差和DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间的切换时间,确定DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。For the handover from reception to reception, for example, a handover between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources. When the MT received signal and the DU received signal power are significantly different, the switching time between the two cannot be ignored. It can be determined according to the time difference between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource and the switching time between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource. Protection parameters for switching between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources.
对于发送至发送的切换,再如,DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间的切换。当MT发送 信号与DU的发送信号功率差别较大时,两者的切换时间不可以忽略,可根据DU下行资源与MT上行资源的时间差和DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间的切换时间,确定DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。For the switch from sending to sending, another example is the switch between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources. When the power difference between the MT transmission signal and the DU transmission signal is large, the switching time between the two cannot be ignored. It can be determined according to the time difference between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource and the switching time between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource. Protection parameters for switching between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources.
下面结合具体场景对如何确定DU资源与MT资源之间的保护参数进行详细说明。The following describes in detail how to determine the protection parameters between DU resources and MT resources in combination with specific scenarios.
场景一:确定MT下行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。Scenario 1: Determine protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU downlink resources.
由于IAB节点对于MT下行资源执行的是接收动作,对于DU下行资源执行的是发送动作。因此IAB节点在MT下行资源与DU下行资源之间进行切换时,需要进行收发切换或者发收切换。IAB节点可以基于MT下行资源和DU下行资源的时间差Δ DD、MT接收至DU发送的切换时间t1,确定MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护参数。或者,LAB节点可以基于MT下行资源和DU下行资源的时间差Δ DD以及DU发送至MT接收的切换时间t2,确定DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数。 Since the IAB node performs a receiving action on the MT downlink resource, and performs a sending action on the DU downlink resource. Therefore, when the IAB node switches between the MT downlink resource and the DU downlink resource, it needs to perform a transmit and receive switch or a transmit and receive switch. IAB node may be based on the time difference Δ DD DU MT downlink resources and downlink resources, MT receiver to the switching time T1 DU transmitted, to determine protection switching MT downlink resource parameter DU downlink resources. Alternatively, LAB MT downlink node based on the time and resources of downlink resources DU difference Δ DD and DU sent to the MT receives the switching time t2, switching determination DU downlink resource protection parameters to MT downlink resources.
1)确定DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔。1) Determine the guard interval for switching between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources.
DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔具体可以为:MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护间隔,或DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护间隔。The guard interval for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource.
如图9所示,对于MT下行资源至DU下行资源的切换,DU下行资源加切换时间t1与MT下行资源的重叠时间为t1+Δ DD。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号接收,本申请将此重叠时间t1+Δ DD称为MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护间隔。 9, the downlink resources for the MT to handover, downlink resources DU DU Gache downlink resources for time t1 and time overlapping downlink resources for the MT t1 + Δ DD. To avoid resource conflicts, can not be performed within this period MT signal reception, the present application this overlapping time t1 + Δ DD called MT downlink resource switched to a protection interval DU downlink resources.
如图9所示,对于DU下行资源至MT下行资源的切换,DU下行资源加切换时间t2与MT下行资源的重叠时间为t2-Δ DD。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号接收,本申请将此重叠时间t2-Δ DD称为DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护间隔。 9, for a downlink resource to DU MT downlink resource handover, downlink resource Gache DU for time t2 and time overlapping downlink resources for the MT t2-Δ DD. To avoid resource conflicts, can not be performed within this period MT signal reception, the present application this overlapping time t2-Δ DD DU downlink resource called a guard interval is switched to the MT downlink resources.
2)确定DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量。2) Determine the number of protection symbols for switching between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources.
DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU下行资源之前的保护符号的数量a。或,DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU下行资源之后的保护符号的数量b。The number of protection symbols for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU downlink resource. Or, the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU downlink resource.
例如,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000003
本申请实施例中,Δt可以是一个符号的长度。
E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000003
In the embodiment of the present application, Δt may be the length of one symbol.
一种示例性说明中,如图9所示,DU使用符号4。若t1+Δ DD不大于一个符号的长度,Δ DD小于t2,且t2-Δ DD不大于一个符号的长度,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000004
表示DU符号前的保护符号的数量为1,DU符号后的保护符号的数量为1。因此,在MT处,除了索引重合的符号4,符号3与符号5也是不可用的。
In an exemplary description, as shown in FIG. 9, the symbol 4 is used for DU. If t1+Δ DD is not greater than the length of one symbol, Δ DD is less than t2, and t2-Δ DD is not greater than the length of one symbol, we can get
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000004
Indicates that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 1, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 1. Therefore, at the MT, except for the symbol 4 whose index overlaps, the symbol 3 and the symbol 5 are also unavailable.
另一种示例性说明中,如图10所示,DU使用符号4。若MT资源与DU资源的时间差更大,因此与DU符号同索引的MT符号可以为可用,在这种情况下,可以将DU符号后的保护符号记为负数。例如,t1+Δ DD大于两个符号的长度且不大于三个符号的长度,Δ DD大于t2,且│t2-Δ DD│大于一个符号的长度,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000005
表示DU符号前的保护符号的数量为3,DU符号后的保护符号的数量为-1。因此,在MT处,索引重合的符号4可用,符号1~3不可用的。
In another exemplary description, as shown in FIG. 10, the symbol 4 is used for DU. If the time difference between the MT resource and the DU resource is greater, the MT symbol with the same index as the DU symbol may be available. In this case, the protection symbol after the DU symbol may be recorded as a negative number. For example, if t1+Δ DD is greater than the length of two symbols and not greater than the length of three symbols, Δ DD is greater than t2, and │t2-Δ DD │ is greater than the length of one symbol, you can get
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000005
It means that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 3, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is -1. Therefore, at the MT, symbol 4 with the same index is available, and symbols 1 to 3 are not available.
3)确定DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。3) Determine the available symbol index deviation for switching between DU downlink resources and MT downlink resources.
DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU下行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e。或DU下行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的可 用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU下行资源的结束符号的索引与MT下行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f。偏差e=a+1,偏差f=b+1。The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the MT downlink resource. The deviation e between the indexes of the end symbols. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the MT downlink resource The deviation f between the indexes of the starting symbol. Deviation e=a+1, deviation f=b+1.
一种示例性说明中,如图9所示,DU下行资源的起始符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的结束符号的索引为2。DU下行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e为2。DU下行资源的结束符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的起始符号的索引为6,DU下行资源的结束符号的索引与MT下行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f为2。In an exemplary illustration, as shown in FIG. 9, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2. The deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2. The index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2.
另一种示例性说明中,如图10所示,DU下行资源的起始符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的结束符号的索引为0。DU下行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e为4。DU下行资源的结束符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的起始符号的索引为4,DU下行资源的结束符号的索引与MT下行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f为0。In another exemplary description, as shown in FIG. 10, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 0. The deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 4. The index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 4, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 0.
场景二:确定MT下行资源和DU上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。Scenario 2: Determine protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU uplink resources.
由于IAB节点对于MT下行资源以及DU上行资源执行的动作都是接收,因此IAB节点可以基于MT下行资源和DU上行资源的时间差Δ DU、MT接收至DU接收的切换时间t3,确定MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数。或者,LAB节点可以基于MT下行资源和DU上行资源的时间差Δ DU、DU接收至MT接收的切换时间t4,确定DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数。其中,MT接收至DU接收的切换时间,与DU接收至MT接收的切换时间可以相同,即t3可以等于t4。或者,t3也可以不等于t4。 Since the actions performed by the IAB node for MT downlink resources and DU uplink resources are all receiving, the IAB node can determine the MT downlink resource switching based on the time difference Δ DU between the MT downlink resource and the DU uplink resource and the switching time t3 from MT reception to DU reception Protection parameters of the uplink resources to the DU. Alternatively, the LAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource based on the time difference Δ DU between the MT downlink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t4 from the DU reception to the MT reception. Wherein, the switching time from MT reception to DU reception may be the same as the switching time from DU reception to MT reception, that is, t3 may be equal to t4. Or, t3 may not be equal to t4.
1)确定DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔。1) Determine the guard interval for switching between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources.
DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔具体可以为:MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护间隔,或DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护间隔。The guard interval for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource.
对于MT下行资源至DU上行资源的切换,DU上行资源加切换时间t3与MT下行资源的重叠时间为t3+Δ DU。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号接收,本申请将此重叠时间t3+Δ DU称为MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护间隔。 For the switch from MT downlink resource to DU uplink resource, the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t3 and MT downlink resource is t3+Δ DU . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot receive signals during this period of time. This overlap time t3+ ΔDU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource in this application.
对于DU上行资源至MT下行资源的切换,DU上行资源加切换时间t4与MT下行资源的重叠时间为t4-Δ DU。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号接收,本申请将此重叠时间t4-Δ DU称为DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护间隔。 For the switch from DU uplink resource to MT downlink resource, the overlap time of the DU uplink resource plus the switching time t4 and the MT downlink resource is t4-Δ DU . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot perform signal reception during this period of time. This overlapping time t4- ΔDU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource in this application.
2)确定DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量。2) Determine the number of protection symbols for switching between DU uplink resources and MT downlink resources.
DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU上行资源之前的保护符号的数量a。或,DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU上行资源之后的保护符号的数量b。The number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU uplink resource. Or, the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
例如,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000006
本申请实施例中,Δt可以是一个符号的长度。
E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000006
In the embodiment of the present application, Δt may be the length of one symbol.
一种实现中,接收至接收的切换所花费的时间较短,因此可以忽略接收至接收的切换时间,即t3、t4可以等于0。一种示例性说明中,如图11所示,DU使用符号4。若t3+Δ DU不大于一个符号的长度,且t4-Δ DU不大于一个符号的长度,即
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000007
表示DU符号前的保护符号数目为1,DU符号后的保护符号数目为0。因此,在MT处,除了索引重合的符号4,符号3也是不可用的。
In one implementation, the time taken to switch from receiving to receiving is relatively short, so the switching time from receiving to receiving can be ignored, that is, t3 and t4 can be equal to zero. In an exemplary illustration, as shown in FIG. 11, the symbol 4 is used for DU. If t3+Δ DU is not greater than the length of one symbol, and t4-Δ DU is not greater than the length of one symbol, that is
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000007
Indicates that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 1, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 0. Therefore, at the MT, except for the symbol 4 whose index overlaps, the symbol 3 is also unavailable.
3)确定DU上行资源与MT下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。3) Determine the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource.
DU上行资源与MT下行资源的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从MT下行资源切换至 DU上行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU上行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e。或,DU上行资源与MT下行资源的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU上行资源的结束符号的索引与MT下行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f。偏差e=a+1,偏差f=b+1。The available symbol index deviation of the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation of switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource The deviation between e. Or, the available symbol index deviation of the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation of switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the start symbol of the MT downlink resource The deviation between the indexes f. Deviation e=a+1, deviation f=b+1.
例如,如图11所示,DU上行资源的起始符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的结束符号的索引为2。DU上行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e为2。DU上行资源的结束符号的索引为4,MT下行资源的起始符号的索引为5,DU上行资源的结束符号的索引与MT下行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f为1。For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2. The deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource is 2. The index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 5, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT downlink resource is 1.
场景三:确定MT上行资源和DU上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。Scenario 3: Determine protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU uplink resources.
由于IAB节点对于MT上行资源执行的是发送动作,对于DU上行资源执行的是接收动作,因此IAB节点在MT上行资源与DU上行资源之间进行切换时,需要进行收发切换或者发收切换。IAB节点可以基于MT上行资源和DU上行资源的时间差Δ UU、MT发送至DU接收的切换时间t1,确定MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数。或者,LAB节点可以基于MT上行资源和DU上行资源的时间差Δ UU、DU接收至MT发送的切换时间t2,确定DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护参数。 Since the IAB node performs a sending action on MT uplink resources and a receiving action on DU uplink resources, when switching between MT uplink resources and DU uplink resources, the IAB node needs to perform a transmit and receive switch or a transmit and receive switch. The IAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource based on the time difference Δ UU between the MT uplink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t1 sent by the MT to the DU reception. Alternatively, the LAB node may determine the protection parameter for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource based on the time difference Δ UU between the MT uplink resource and the DU uplink resource, and the switching time t2 from the DU reception to the MT transmission.
1)确定DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔。1) Determine the guard interval for switching between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources.
DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔具体可以为:MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护间隔,或DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护间隔。The guard interval for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the guard interval when the MT uplink resource is switched to the DU uplink resource, or the guard interval when the DU uplink resource is switched to the MT uplink resource.
如图12所示,对于MT上行资源至DU上行资源的切换,DU上行资源加切换时间t1与MT上行资源的重叠时间为t1+Δ UU。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号发送,本申请将此重叠时间t1+Δ UU称为MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护间隔。 As shown in Fig. 12, for the switch from MT uplink resource to DU uplink resource, the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t1 and MT uplink resource is t1+ ΔUU . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time, and this overlapping time t1+ ΔUU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource in this application.
如图12所示,对于DU上行资源至MT上行资源的切换,DU上行资源加切换时间t2与MT上行资源的重叠时间为t2-Δ UU。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号发送,本申请将此重叠时间t2-Δ UU称为DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护间隔。 As shown in FIG. 12, for the switching from DU uplink resource to MT uplink resource, the overlap time of DU uplink resource plus switching time t2 and MT uplink resource is t2- ΔUU . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time. This overlap time t2- ΔUU is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource in this application.
2)确定DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量。2) Determine the number of protection symbols for switching between DU uplink resources and MT uplink resources.
DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU上行资源之前的保护符号的数量a。DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU上行资源之后的保护符号的数量b。The number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU uplink resource. The number of protection symbols for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
例如,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000008
本申请实施例中,Δt可以是一个符号的长度。
E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000008
In the embodiment of the present application, Δt may be the length of one symbol.
一种示例性说明中,若t1+Δ UU不大于一个符号的长度,且t2-Δ UU不大于一个符号的长度,即
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000009
可定义DU符号前的保护符号数目为1,DU符号后的保护符号数目为1。当DU使用符号4时,在MT处,除了索引重合的符号4,符号3与符号5也是不可用的,如图12所示。
In an exemplary description, if t1+Δ UU is not greater than the length of one symbol, and t2-Δ UU is not greater than the length of one symbol, that is
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000009
It can be defined that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 1, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 1. When DU uses symbol 4, at MT, except for symbol 4 whose index overlaps, symbol 3 and symbol 5 are also unavailable, as shown in Figure 12.
3)确定DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。3) Determine the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource.
DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU上行资源的起始符号的索引与MT上行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e。或DU上行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:从DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU上行资源的结束符号的索引与MT上行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f。偏差e=a+1, 偏差f=b+1。The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the MT uplink resource. The deviation e between the indexes of the end symbols. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU uplink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the MT uplink resource. The deviation f between the indexes of the starting symbol. Deviation e=a+1, deviation f=b+1.
例如,如图12所示,DU上行资源的起始符号的索引为4,MT上行资源的结束符号的索引为2。DU上行资源的起始符号的索引与MT上行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e为2。DU上行资源的结束符号的索引为4,MT上行资源的起始符号的索引为6,DU上行资源的结束符号的索引与MT上行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f为2。For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2. The deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2. The index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
场景四:确定MT上行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。Scenario 4: Determine protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU downlink resources.
由于IAB节点对于MT上行资源以及DU下行资源执行的动作都是发送。因此IAB节点可以基于MT上行资源和DU下行资源的时间差Δ UD、MT发送至DU发送的切换时间t5,确定MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护参数。或者,基于IAB节点可以基于MT上行资源和DU下行资源的时间差Δ UD、DU发送至MT发送的切换时间t6,确定DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数。其中,MT发送至DU发送的切换时间,与DU发送至MT发送的切换时间可以相同,即t5可以等于t6。或者,t5也可以不等于t6。 Because the actions performed by the IAB node on the MT uplink resources and the DU downlink resources are all sending. IAB node may thus time difference Δ UD MT uplink resource and the downlink resource based on DU, send to the switching time T5 MT DU transmitted, to determine protection switching MT uplink resource parameter DU downlink resources. Alternatively, the node may be based on IAB time difference Δ UD MT uplink resource and the downlink resource based on DU, DU MT sends the transmission to the switching time t6, where DU uplink resource is determined to switch to the protection parameters MT downlink resources. Among them, the switching time sent from the MT to the DU can be the same as the switching time from the DU to the MT, that is, t5 can be equal to t6. Or, t5 may not be equal to t6.
1)确定MT上行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔。1) Determine the guard interval for switching between MT uplink resources and DU downlink resources.
MT上行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔具体可以为:MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护间隔,或DU下行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护间隔。The guard interval for switching between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource may specifically be: the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, or the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource.
对于MT上行资源至DU下行资源的切换,DU下行资源加切换时间t5与MT上行资源的重叠时间为t5+Δ UD。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号发送,本申请将此重叠时间t5+Δ UD称为MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护间隔。 For the switch from MT uplink resource to DU downlink resource, the overlap time of DU downlink resource plus switching time t5 and MT uplink resource is t5+ ΔUD . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time. This overlap time t5+ ΔUD is referred to as the guard interval for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource in this application.
对于DU下行资源至MT上行资源的切换,DU下行资源加切换时间t6与MT上行资源的重叠时间为t6-Δ UD。为避免资源冲突,此段时间内MT不能进行信号发送,本申请将此重叠时间t6-Δ UD称为DU下行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护间隔。 For the switch from DU downlink resource to MT uplink resource, the overlap time of DU downlink resource plus switching time t6 and MT uplink resource is t6- ΔUD . In order to avoid resource conflicts, the MT cannot perform signal transmission during this period of time, and this overlapping time t6- ΔUD is referred to as the guard interval for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource in this application.
2)确定MT上行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量。2) Determine the number of protection symbols for switching between MT uplink resources and DU downlink resources.
MT上行资源和DU下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量具体可以为:MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU下行资源之前的保护符号的数量a。或,DU下行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护符号的数量,即DU上行资源之后的保护符号的数量b。The number of protection symbols for switching between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource may specifically be: the number of protection symbols for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the number a of the protection symbols before the DU downlink resource. Or, the number of protection symbols for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the number of protection symbols b after the DU uplink resource.
例如,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000010
本申请实施例中,Δt可以是一个符号的长度。
E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000010
In the embodiment of the present application, Δt may be the length of one symbol.
一种示例性说明中,若Δ UD不大于一个符号的长度,即
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000011
可定义DU符号前的保护符号数目为0,DU符号后的保护符号数目为1。当DU使用符号4时,在MT处,除了索引重合的符号4,符号5也是不可用的,如图13所示。
In an exemplary description, if Δ UD is not greater than the length of one symbol, that is
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000011
It can be defined that the number of protection symbols before the DU symbol is 0, and the number of protection symbols after the DU symbol is 1. When DU uses symbol 4, at MT, except for symbol 4 whose index overlaps, symbol 5 is also unavailable, as shown in Figure 13.
3)确定DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。3) Determine the available symbol index deviation for switching between DU downlink resources and MT uplink resources.
DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU下行资源的起始符号的索引与MT上行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e。或DU下行资源与MT上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差具体可以为:DU下行资源切换至MT上行资源的可用符号索引偏差,即DU下行资源的结束符号的索引与MT上行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f。偏差e=a+1,偏差f=b+1。The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource, that is, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the end of the MT uplink resource The deviation e between the indices of the symbols. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU downlink resource and the MT uplink resource may specifically be: the available symbol index deviation for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT uplink resource, that is, the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the start of the MT uplink resource The deviation f between the indexes of the starting symbol. Deviation e=a+1, deviation f=b+1.
例如,如图13所示,DU下行资源的起始符号的索引为4,MT上行资源的结束符号的索引为3。DU下行资源的起始符号的索引与MT上行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e为1。DU下行资源的结束符号的索引为4,MT上行资源的起始符号的索引为6,DU下行资源的结束符号的索引与MT上行资源的起始符号的索引之间的偏差f为2。For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 3. The deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT uplink resource is 1. The index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource is 4, the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 6, and the deviation f between the index of the end symbol of the DU downlink resource and the index of the start symbol of the MT uplink resource is 2.
应注意的是,DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号:如果保护符号的数量为N1,DU使用了符号M,受此符号传输的影响,后续MT的第一个可用符号为符号M+N1+1,如果计算得到的符号索引超过了时隙内最大符号索引(即13),则将其延伸至下一时隙。例如,图14A给出了三个时隙的示例(依次记为时隙0,时隙1和时隙2),假设DU至MT的保护符号数目为1,在图14A上,DU在时隙1的最后一个可用符号是符号10,则后续的第一个MT符号为同时隙的符号12;而在图14B下,DU在时隙0的最后一个可用符号是符号13,则后续的第一个MT符号为下一时隙的符号1。It should be noted that the DU resource is switched to the protection symbol of the MT resource: if the number of protection symbols is N1, the DU uses the symbol M, and affected by the transmission of this symbol, the first available symbol of the subsequent MT is the symbol M+N1+ 1. If the calculated symbol index exceeds the maximum symbol index in the slot (that is, 13), it is extended to the next slot. For example, Figure 14A shows an example of three time slots (denoted as time slot 0, time slot 1 and time slot 2 in turn). Assuming that the number of protection symbols from DU to MT is 1, in Figure 14A, DU is in the time slot. The last available symbol of 1 is symbol 10, and the subsequent first MT symbol is symbol 12 of the simultaneous slot; and in Figure 14B, the last available symbol of DU in slot 0 is symbol 13, and the subsequent first symbol Each MT symbol is symbol 1 of the next slot.
MT资源切换至DU资源的保护符号:如果保护符号的数量为N2,DU使用了符号M,受此符号传输的影响,之前MT的最后一个可用符号为符号M-N2-1,如果符号索引的取值小于0,则将其延伸至上一个时隙。例如,图14A给出了三个时隙的示例(依次记为时隙0,时隙1和时隙2),假设MT至DU的保护符号数目为1,在图14A上,DU在时隙1的第一个可用符号是符号3,则之前的最后一个MT符号为同时隙的符号1;而在图14B下,DU在时隙2的第一个可用符号是符号0,则之前的最后一个MT符号为上一时隙的符号12。MT resource is switched to the protection symbol of DU resource: If the number of protection symbols is N2 and DU uses symbol M, affected by this symbol transmission, the last available symbol of MT before is symbol M-N2-1, if the symbol index is If the value is less than 0, it will be extended to the previous time slot. For example, Figure 14A shows an example of three time slots (denoted as time slot 0, time slot 1 and time slot 2 in turn). Assuming that the number of protection symbols from MT to DU is 1, in Figure 14A, the DU is in the time slot. The first available symbol of 1 is symbol 3, then the last MT symbol before is the symbol 1 of the simultaneous slot; and in Figure 14B, the first available symbol of DU in slot 2 is symbol 0, then the last symbol before One MT symbol is the symbol 12 of the previous time slot.
上述保护符号的计算公式可能得到负数的保护符号数目,负数的保护符号数目表示MT和DU可能使用同样资源索引的符号。例如,假设DU资源至MT资源的保护符号数目为-1,而DU的最后一个可用符号的索引为符号2,则后续MT的第一个可用符号为同时隙的符号2。The above calculation formula of protection symbols may obtain the number of protection symbols with a negative number, and the number of protection symbols with a negative number indicates that MT and DU may use symbols with the same resource index. For example, assuming that the number of protection symbols from DU resource to MT resource is -1, and the index of the last available symbol of the DU is symbol 2, then the first available symbol of the subsequent MT is symbol 2 of the simultaneous slot.
在一种可能的实现中,协议不定义负数的保护符号的数量,即当计算出的保护符号的数量为负数时,将其视为0。In a possible implementation, the protocol does not define the number of protection symbols for negative numbers, that is, when the calculated number of protection symbols is negative, it is regarded as 0.
应理解,上述方法确定的MT可用符号均为可能的可用符号,这是因为上述方法确定的可用符号仅考虑了最后一个DU符号以及第一个DU符号对MT符号的影响,而未考虑其余符号的因素。实际MT的可用符号应该为根据所有相关DU资源和保护符号信息推导出可用符号的交集。It should be understood that the MT available symbols determined by the above method are all possible available symbols, because the available symbols determined by the above method only consider the last DU symbol and the influence of the first DU symbol on the MT symbol, but not the remaining symbols. the elements of. The available symbols of the actual MT should be the intersection of the available symbols derived from all relevant DU resources and protection symbol information.
综上所述,考虑MT的上行资源与下行资源以及DU的上行资源与下行资源,可以得到4种资源组合,而每种资源组合有两种切换情况(即DU资源至MT资源切换,和MT资源至DU资源切换)。因此,IAB节点可确定8种切换情况下的保护参数,如下表2所示。In summary, considering the uplink and downlink resources of the MT and the uplink and downlink resources of the DU, four resource combinations can be obtained, and there are two handover scenarios for each resource combination (ie, DU resource to MT resource switching, and MT Resource to DU resource switch). Therefore, the IAB node can determine the protection parameters in 8 handover situations, as shown in Table 2 below.
表2Table 2
 To DU上行DU uplink DU下行DU downstream
MT下行MT down (A1,B1)(A1, B1) (C1,D1)(C1, D1)
MT上行MT up (E1,F1)(E1, F1) (G1,H1)(G1, H1)
其中,A1表示从MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数。B1表示从DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数。C1表示从MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护参数。D1表示从DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数。E1表示从MT上行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数。F1表示从DU上行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护参数。G1表示从MT上行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护参数。H2表示从DU下行资源切换至MT上行资源的保护参数。Among them, A1 represents the protection parameter for switching from MT downlink resource to DU uplink resource. B1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT downlink resource. C1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource. D1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource. E1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU uplink resource. F1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the DU uplink resource to the MT uplink resource. G1 represents the protection parameter for switching from the MT uplink resource to the DU downlink resource. H2 represents the protection parameter for switching from DU downlink resources to MT uplink resources.
可见,IAB节点获取到DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔之后,就可根据DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔确定DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。IAB节点根据DU的资源配置信息,以及DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差,就可确定MT的可用资源。为避免资源冲突,IAB 节点的上级节点或宿主节点也需要确定MT的可用资源。然而IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点可能未获取到DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差,因此,IAB节点还可向上级节点上报其保护参数。It can be seen that after the IAB node obtains the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, it can determine the number of guard symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources according to the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource. The IAB node can determine the available resources of the MT according to the resource configuration information of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource, or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource. In order to avoid resource conflicts, the superior node or host node of the IAB node also needs to determine the available resources of the MT. However, the superior node or host node of the IAB node may not obtain the number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources or the deviation of the available symbol index for switching between DU resources and MT resources. Therefore, the IAB node may also The upper-level node reports its protection parameters.
例如,IAB节点可向其上级节点或宿主节点上报以下保护参数中的一种:DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、上报DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量和DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。如果IAB节点上报的是DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔,IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点可根据该保护间隔确定DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差,进而根据DU的资源配置信息和该保护符号的数量或该可用符号索引偏差确定MT的可用资源。For example, the IAB node can report one of the following protection parameters to its superior node or host node: the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the number of protection symbols that report the switching between DU resources and MT resources, and The available symbol index deviation for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource. If the IAB node reports the guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the superior node or host node of the IAB node can determine the number of protection symbols or DU resources for switching between DU resources and MT resources according to the guard interval. The available symbol index deviation for switching with the MT resource, and then the available resource of the MT is determined according to the resource configuration information of the DU and the number of the protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation.
或者,IAB节点也可不向其上级节点或宿主节点上报其保护参数,IAB节点可向其上级节点或宿主节点上报DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差。协议可能定义DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的最大切换时间。IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点根据该时间差和该最大切换时间确定DU资源与MT资源之间的保护间隔,进而可以根据DU资源与MT资源之间的保护间隔确定DU资源与MT资源之间的保护符号的数量或可用符号索引偏差,进而根据DU的资源配置信息和该保护符号的数量或该可用符号索引偏差确定MT可用的资源。Alternatively, the IAB node may not report its protection parameters to its upper-level node or host node, and the IAB node may report the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource to its upper-level node or host node. The protocol may define the maximum switching time for switching between DU resources and MT resources. The superior node or host node of the IAB node determines the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource according to the time difference and the maximum switching time, and then can determine the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource according to the guard interval between the DU resource and the MT resource. The number of protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation, and then the resource available for the MT is determined according to the resource configuration information of the DU and the number of the protection symbols or the available symbol index deviation.
或者,IAB节点确定出MT可用资源的起始符号或MT可用资源的结束符号之后,可直接向其上级节点或宿主节点上报MT可用资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用资源的结束符号的索引。MT可用资源的起始符号是指在一段连续的DU的可用符号之后的MT的第一个可用符号。MT可用资源的结束符号是指在一段连续的DU的可用符号之前的MT的最后一个可用符号。例如,如图13所示,MT可用资源的起始符号的索引为6,MT可用资源的结束符号的索引为3。在这里,DU的可用符号包括DU始终可用的符号,即DU的hard符号,还包括通过动态信令确定的DU可用符号,例如通过动态信令指示为可用的DU的soft符号。Alternatively, after the IAB node determines the start symbol of the MT available resource or the end symbol of the MT available resource, it can directly report the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource or the index of the end symbol of the MT available resource to its superior node or host node . The start symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the first available symbol of the MT after the available symbols of a continuous DU. The end symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the last available symbol of the MT before the available symbols of a continuous DU. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource is 6, and the index of the end symbol of the MT available resource is 3. Here, the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
综上所述IAB节点可以向其上级节点或宿主节点上报第一信息,该第一信息包括DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数、DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差、MT可用资源的起始符号或MT可用资源的结束符号。上级节点或宿主节点根据第一信息可以确定MT的可用资源。In summary, the IAB node can report first information to its superior node or host node. The first information includes protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the time difference between DU resources and MT resources, and MT available resources. The start symbol of the MT or the end symbol of the available resources of the MT. The upper-level node or the host node can determine the available resources of the MT according to the first information.
根据上述示例可以看出,部分保护参数(例如保护符号数目)与符号的长度Δt相关,此时,上报应对基于一定符号长度假设进行。符号长度的假设包括对子载波间隔的假设和/或对循环前缀类型的假设。According to the above example, it can be seen that some protection parameters (such as the number of protection symbols) are related to the symbol length Δt. At this time, the reporting should be based on the assumption of a certain symbol length. The symbol length assumptions include assumptions about subcarrier spacing and/or assumptions about cyclic prefix types.
在NR中,IAB的上级节点与MT采用多波束进行通信。因此,MT下行资源与DU资源之间的时间差可能有多个。或者,MT上行资源与DU资源之间的时间差可能有多个。因此,只确定MT的一套时域位置已经不能满足IAB和上级节点的需求。采用MT的一套时域位置进行调度,有可能造成资源冲突。为此,本申请实施例提供了一种资源确定方法,能够准确地确定MT的多套时域位置。In NR, the upper-level node of the IAB communicates with the MT using multiple beams. Therefore, there may be multiple time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources. Or, there may be multiple time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources. Therefore, only determining a set of time domain locations of the MT can no longer meet the needs of the IAB and superior nodes. Using a set of time domain locations of the MT for scheduling may cause resource conflicts. For this reason, the embodiment of the present application provides a resource determination method, which can accurately determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的资源确定方法进行具体说明。The resource determination method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with the drawings.
请参见图15,图15为本申请提供的一种资源确定方法的流程图,该方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a method for determining a resource provided by this application. The method includes:
1501、第一节点确定IAB节点的DU资源的时域位置。1501. The first node determines the time domain location of the DU resource of the IAB node.
其中,第一节点可以为IAB节点本身,这种情况下,第一节点确定的是自身的DU资源 的时域位置。或者,第一节点也可以为该IAB节点的上级节点或者宿主节点,这种情况下,第一节点确定的是该IAB节点的DU资源的时域位置。The first node may be the IAB node itself. In this case, the first node determines the time domain location of its own DU resource. Alternatively, the first node may also be an upper node or host node of the IAB node. In this case, the first node determines the time domain location of the DU resource of the IAB node.
在这里,DU资源的时域位置包括DU各种类型或性质资源的时域位置,例如,DU资源的时域位置具体包括DU可用资源的时域位置。在这里,DU的可用资源包括DU始终可用的资源,即DU的hard资源,还包括通过动态信令确定的DU可用资源,例如通过动态信令指示为可用的DU的soft资源。Here, the time domain position of the DU resource includes the time domain position of various types or properties of the DU resource. For example, the time domain position of the DU resource specifically includes the time domain position of the DU available resource. Here, the available resources of the DU include the resources that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard resources of the DU, and the available resources of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft resources of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
具体实施中,该IAB节点可以是网络设备,例如中继设备,也可以是IAB节点。或者IAB节点可以是终端设备,例如UE中继等。或者IAB节点也可以是其他的需要和其他IAB节点进行数据回传的IAB节点等等,这里不做具体限定。In specific implementation, the IAB node may be a network device, such as a relay device, or it may be an IAB node. Or the IAB node may be a terminal device, such as a UE relay. Or the IAB node may also be other IAB nodes that need to return data with other IAB nodes, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
一种示例性说明中,时域位置,可以指时域索引,例如帧号,时隙编号,符号编号,或上述编号的组合,例如时隙编号加符号编号等等。In an exemplary description, the time domain position may refer to a time domain index, such as a frame number, a time slot number, a symbol number, or a combination of the foregoing numbers, such as a time slot number plus a symbol number, and so on.
1502、第一节点确定IAB节点的MT的多套时域位置。1502. The first node determines multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT of the IAB node.
其中,MT的多套时域位置具体可以为MT的多套可用的时域位置。MT的多套时域位置与以下信息中的一项或多项有关:DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的资源性质、DU的动态资源指示信息和MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。该第二信息包括接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息。该第一信息包括时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息。该时间差为DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差。该保护参数为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数。符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的结束符号的索引。Among them, the multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT may specifically be multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT. The multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information of the DU, and the multiple information of the MT. The first information corresponding to each second information in the second information. The second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information. The first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information. The time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource. The protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource. The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
本申请实施例中,DU资源的类型可以为上行或者下行或者灵活。其中,DU的上行资源始终用于上行传输,DU的下行资源始终用于下行传输,DU的灵活资源指该资源可以用于上行传输或者下行传输。同样,MT资源的类型也可以为上行或者下行或者灵活。MT的上行资源始终用于上行传输,MT的下行资源始终用于下行传输,MT的灵活资源指该资源可以在信令的配置下指示为用于上行传输或者下行传输。In the embodiment of this application, the type of the DU resource can be uplink or downlink or flexible. Among them, the uplink resource of the DU is always used for uplink transmission, the downlink resource of the DU is always used for downlink transmission, and the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission. Similarly, the type of MT resource can also be uplink or downlink or flexible. The uplink resource of the MT is always used for uplink transmission, the downlink resource of the MT is always used for downlink transmission, and the flexible resource of the MT means that the resource can be indicated as being used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission under the configuration of signaling.
本申请实施例中,DU资源的资源性质可以为hard和soft。DU hard资源为DU始终可用的资源。DU soft资源的可用性可通过动态指示信令确定。例如,上级节点可通过DCI等信令直接指示IAB节点DU soft资源的可用性。或者,上级节点可通过DCI等信令指示IAB节点MT资源的可用性,而IAB节点根据上级节点对MT资源可用性的指示确定其DU soft资源的可用性。In the embodiment of this application, the resource nature of the DU resource can be hard and soft. The DU hard resource is a resource that is always available to the DU. The availability of DU soft resources can be determined through dynamic indication signaling. For example, the upper-level node can directly indicate the availability of DU soft resources of the IAB node through signaling such as DCI. Alternatively, the upper-level node may indicate the availability of the MT resource of the IAB node through signaling such as DCI, and the IAB node determines the availability of its DU soft resource according to the upper-level node's indication of the MT resource availability.
本申请实施例中,该DU的动态资源指示信息用于指示DU可用的soft资源。In this embodiment of the application, the dynamic resource indication information of the DU is used to indicate the soft resources available to the DU.
本申请实施例中,接收配置信息可以为传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator,TCI-state)信息,准共址(Quasico-location,QCL)信息或其他接收配置信息。发送配置信息可以为空间关系信息(SpatialRelationInfo)或其他发送配置信息。小区组信息可以为定时提前组(Timing advance group,TAG)信息或者小区组标识等。In the embodiment of the present application, the receiving configuration information may be transmission configuration indicator (Transmission Configuration Indicator, TCI-state) information, quasi co-location (Quasico-location, QCL) information, or other receiving configuration information. The sending configuration information may be SpatialRelationInfo or other sending configuration information. The cell group information may be timing advance group (Timing advance group, TAG) information or cell group identification, etc.
应理解,IAB节点的MT可根据接收配置信息确定下行接收所采用的参数,包括接收定时、接收波束、接收空间滤波器或信道估计参数。类似地,IAB节点的MT可根据发送配置信息确定上行发送所采用的参数、包括发送定时、发送波束、发送功率或发送空间滤波器。It should be understood that the MT of the IAB node can determine the parameters used for downlink reception according to the receiving configuration information, including receiving timing, receiving beam, receiving spatial filter, or channel estimation parameters. Similarly, the MT of the IAB node can determine the parameters used for uplink transmission, including transmission timing, transmission beam, transmission power, or transmission spatial filter according to the transmission configuration information.
本申请实施例中,保护参数可以为上述保护参数确定方法中介绍的保护参数。例如,保护参数可以为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。关于保护 参数的具体介绍可参见上述保护参数确定方法中对应的描述,在此不赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the protection parameter may be the protection parameter introduced in the foregoing protection parameter determination method. For example, the protection parameter may be a guard interval for switching between DU resources and MT resources, the number of protection symbols for switching between DU resources and MT resources, or an available symbol index deviation for switching between DU resources and MT resources. For the specific introduction of the protection parameters, please refer to the corresponding description in the above-mentioned protection parameter determination method, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,MT可用资源的起始符号是指在一段连续的DU的可用符号之后的MT的第一个可用符号。在这里,DU的可用符号包括DU始终可用的符号,即DU的hard符号,还包括通过动态信令确定的DU可用符号,例如通过动态信令指示为可用的DU的soft符号。例如,如图13所示,MT可用资源的起始符号的索引可以为6。MT可用资源的结束符号是指在一段连续的DU的可用符号之前的MT的最后一个可用符号。例如,如图13所示,MT可用资源的结束符号的索引可以为3。In the embodiment of the present application, the start symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the first available symbol of the MT after the available symbols of a continuous DU. Here, the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource may be 6. The end symbol of the available resources of the MT refers to the last available symbol of the MT before the available symbols of a continuous DU. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the index of the end symbol of the available resources of the MT may be 3.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的资源性质、动态资源指示信息、MT的资源配置信息和MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息中的一项或多项来确定MT的多套时域位置。其中,MT的资源配置信息包括MT的资源类型(D/U/F)信息。In a possible implementation, the first node is based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information, the resource configuration information of the MT, and the multiple second information of the MT. One or more items in the first information corresponding to each second information are used to determine multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT. Among them, the resource configuration information of the MT includes the resource type (D/U/F) information of the MT.
举例来说,如图16所示,以第二信息为TCI-state信息,第一信息为保护符号的数量为例。MT被配置有两个接收配置信息,TCI-state#0对应的从DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号的数量为1,TCI-state#1对应的从DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号的数量为2。第一节点基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的可用性和保护符号的数量(1)中的一项或多项来确定第一套时域位置。第一节点基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的可用性和保护符号的数量(2)中的一项或多项来确定第二套时域位置。其中,在第一套时域位置中MT第一个可用符号的索引为4,在第二套时域位置中MT第一个可用符号的索引为5。For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the second information is TCI-state information, and the first information is the number of protection symbols. The MT is configured with two receiving configuration messages. The number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources corresponding to TCI-state#0 is 1, and the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources corresponding to TCI-state#1 is 1. The number is 2. The first node determines the first set of time domain locations based on one or more of the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the availability of the DU resource, and the number of protection symbols (1). The first node determines the second set of time domain positions based on one or more of the time domain position of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the availability of the DU resource, and the number of protection symbols (2). Among them, the index of the first available symbol of the MT in the first set of time domain positions is 4, and the index of the first available symbol of the MT in the second set of time domain positions is 5.
也就是说,第一节点基于MT的不同接收配置信息可确定MT不同的时域位置。其中,第一套时域位置用于接收配置信息1对应的传输。第二套时域位置用于接收配置信息2对应的传输。第二信息为小区组信息或发送配置信息时同理,第一信息为时间差或符号索引信息时同理,在此不赘述。其中,多个第二信息中各个第二信息可以对应不同的第一信息,或者,多个第二信息中有部分第二信息也可对应相同的第一信息,本申请实施例不做限定。In other words, the first node can determine different time domain positions of the MT based on the different reception configuration information of the MT. Among them, the first set of time domain positions is used to receive the transmission corresponding to the configuration information 1. The second set of time domain locations is used to receive the transmission corresponding to configuration information 2. The same is true when the second information is cell group information or sending configuration information, and the same is true when the first information is time difference or symbol index information, which will not be repeated here. Wherein, each second information in the plurality of second information may correspond to different first information, or part of the second information in the plurality of second information may also correspond to the same first information, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
第二参数可以为接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息,下面首先介绍第二信息为小区组信息的情况:The second parameter may be receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information. The following first introduces the case where the second information is cell group information:
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为小区组信息时,DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差具体为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差,DU资源与MT资源进行切换的保护参数为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。在该可能的实现中,第一节点可基于多个小区组信息中各个小区组信息对应的第一信息,确定MT的多套下行时域位置。也就是说,第一节点可以针对不同的小区组信息确定MT的不同下行时域位置。In a possible implementation, when the second information is cell group information, the time difference between DU resources and MT resources is specifically the time difference between DU resources and MT downlink resources, and protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT resources It is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT. The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT. In this possible implementation, the first node may determine multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information. That is, the first node can determine different downlink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information.
在一些情况下,IAB节点的MT可能被配置多个小区组信息,例如,该小区组信息为定时提前组(Timing advance group,TAG)信息。这表示IAB节点的MT的上行信号在不同的服务小区(或分量载波)可以采用不同的上行定时,或者说MT的上行信号在不同的服务小区可以被配置(指示)不同的上行定时提前(TA)量。对应的,MT接收不同TAG所对应服务小区(分量载波)的下行信号时可能具有不同的接收时间。因此,MT被配置有多个小区组信息时,该多个小区组信息可能对应MT下行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间的多个时间差。例如,如图17所示,IAB节点的MT下行资源和DU的下行/上行资源之间具有多个时间差, 图17以DU资源为下行资源。进而,该多个小区组信息可能对应MT下行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间进行切换的多个保护参数。并且该多个小区组信息可能对应MT可用下行资源的多个起始符号或MT可用下行资源的多个结束符号。In some cases, the MT of the IAB node may be configured with multiple cell group information. For example, the cell group information is timing advance group (TAG) information. This means that the uplink signal of the MT of the IAB node can adopt different uplink timings in different serving cells (or component carriers), or that the uplink signal of the MT can be configured (indicating) different uplink timing advances (TAs) in different serving cells. )the amount. Correspondingly, the MT may have different reception times when receiving downlink signals of serving cells (component carriers) corresponding to different TAGs. Therefore, when the MT is configured with multiple cell group information, the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D). For example, as shown in Fig. 17, there are multiple time differences between the MT downlink resource of the IAB node and the downlink/uplink resource of the DU. Fig. 17 uses the DU resource as the downlink resource. Furthermore, the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D). And the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT.
例如,小区组信息与MT下行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表3所示。下表3以小区组信息为TAG信息为例。如下表3所示,MT被配置有2个TAG信息,分别为TAG#0和TAG#1。MT下行资源与DU上行资源之间的时间差具有2个,分别为TAG#0对应的时间差Δ DU1和TAG#1对应的时间差Δ DU2。MT下行资源与DU下行资源之间的时间差具有2个,分别为TAG#0对应的时间差Δ DD1和TAG#1对应的时间差Δ DD2For example, the correspondence between the cell group information and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 3 below. Table 3 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example. As shown in Table 3 below, the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1. The time between the MT downlink resources and uplink resource DU difference having two, respectively, and Δ DU1 TAG # 1 corresponding to the time difference time difference corresponding to the TAG # 0 Δ DU2. There are two time differences between MT downlink resources and DU downlink resources, which are the time difference Δ DD1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the time difference Δ DD2 corresponding to TAG#1.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000012
例如,小区组信息与MT下行资源和DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表4所示。下表4以小区组信息为TAG信息为例。如下表4所示,MT被配置有2个TAG信息,分别为TAG#0和TAG#1。MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的保护参数A1和TAG#1对应的保护参数A2。DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的保护参数B1和TAG#1对应的保护参数B2。MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源的保护参数具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的保护参数C1和TAG#1对应的保护参数C2。DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源的保护参数具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的保护参数D1和TAG#1对应的保护参数D2。For example, the correspondence between the cell group information and the protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 4 below. Table 4 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example. As shown in Table 4 below, the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1. There are two protection parameters for switching from MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources, which are protection parameter A1 corresponding to TAG#0 and protection parameter A2 corresponding to TAG#1. There are two protection parameters for switching from DU uplink resources to MT downlink resources, which are protection parameter B1 corresponding to TAG#0 and protection parameter B2 corresponding to TAG#1. There are two protection parameters for switching the MT downlink resource to the DU downlink resource, which are the protection parameter C1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the protection parameter C2 corresponding to TAG#1. There are two protection parameters for switching the DU downlink resource to the MT downlink resource, which are the protection parameter D1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the protection parameter D2 corresponding to TAG#1.
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000013
再如,小区组信息与MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引的对应关系可如下表5所示。下表5以小区组信息为TAG信息为例。如下表5所示,MT被配置有2个TAG信息,分别为TAG#0和TAG#1。MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源时,MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引M1和TAG#1对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引M2。DU上行资源切换至MT下行资源时,MT可用下行资源的起始符号具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引N1和TAG#1对应的MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引N2。MT下行资源切换至DU下行资源时,MT可用下行资源的结束符号具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引O1和TAG#1对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引O2。DU下行资源切换至MT下行资源时,MT可用下行资源的起始符号具有两个,分别为TAG#0对应的MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引P1和TAG#1对应的MT 可用下行资源的起始符号的索引P2。For another example, the correspondence between the cell group information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 5 below. Table 5 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example. As shown in Table 5 below, the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1. When the MT downlink resource is switched to the DU uplink resource, the index of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource has two, respectively, the index of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0, M1 and the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the end symbol M2. When the DU uplink resource is switched to the MT downlink resource, there are two start symbols of the MT available downlink resource, which are the index N1 of the start symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the starting symbol N2. When the MT downlink resource is switched to the DU downlink resource, there are two end symbols of the MT available downlink resource, which are the index of the end symbol O1 of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the end of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the symbol O2. When the DU downlink resource is switched to the MT downlink resource, there are two start symbols of the MT available downlink resource, which are the index P1 of the start symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 The index of the starting symbol P2.
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000014
因此,由于多个小区组信息可对应多个第一信息(DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差、DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数、MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引),因此,可以根据多个小区组信息中每个小区组信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多套下行时域位置。Therefore, since multiple cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the start of the downlink resource available to the MT The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT), therefore, multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为小区组信息时,DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差具体为时间差为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差,DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。在该可能的实现中,第一节点可基于多个小区组信息中各个小区组信息对应的第一信息,确定MT的多套上行时域位置。也就是说,第一节点可以针对不同的小区组信息确定MT的不同上行时域位置。In a possible implementation, when the second information is cell group information, the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is performed The protection parameter of the handover is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT. The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the MT's uplink available resources, or the symbol index information is the end symbol of the MT's uplink available resources. index of. In this possible implementation, the first node may determine multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information. That is, the first node can determine different uplink time domain positions of the MT for different cell group information.
在一些情况下,IAB节点的MT可能被配置多个小区组信息,例如,该小区组信息为定时提前组(Timing advance group,TAG)信息。这表示IAB节点的MT的上行信号在不同的服务小区(或分量载波)可以采用不同的上行定时,或者说MT的上行信号在不同的服务小区可以被配置(指示)不同的上行定时提前(TA)量。因此,MT被配置有多个小区组信息时,MT上行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间可能有多个时间差。进而,该多个小区组信息可能对应MT上行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间进行切换的多个保护参数。并且该多个小区组信息可能对应MT可用上行资源的多个起始符号或MT可用上行资源的多个结束符号。In some cases, the MT of the IAB node may be configured with multiple cell group information. For example, the cell group information is timing advance group (TAG) information. This means that the uplink signal of the MT of the IAB node can adopt different uplink timings in different serving cells (or component carriers), or that the uplink signal of the MT can be configured (indicating) different uplink timing advances (TAs) in different serving cells. )the amount. Therefore, when the MT is configured with multiple cell group information, there may be multiple time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D). Furthermore, the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D). And the multiple cell group information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available uplink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available uplink resources of the MT.
例如,小区组信息与MT上行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表6所示。下表6以小区组信息为TAG信息为例。如下表6所示,MT被配置有2个TAG信息,分别为TAG#0和TAG#1。MT上行资源与DU上行资源之间的时间差具有2个,分别为TAG#0对应的时间差Δ UU1和TAG#1对应的时间差Δ UU2。MT上行资源与DU下行资源之间的时间差具有2个,分别为TAG#0对应的时间差Δ UD1和TAG#1对应的时间差Δ UD2For example, the correspondence between the cell group information and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 6 below. Table 6 below takes the cell group information as TAG information as an example. As shown in Table 6 below, the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1. The time between the DU MT uplink resource and the uplink resource difference having two, respectively, a time difference [Delta] corresponding to the TAG # 0 UU1 time difference corresponding to TAG # 1 and Δ UU2. There are two time differences between the MT uplink resource and the DU downlink resource, which are the time difference Δ UD1 corresponding to TAG#0 and the time difference Δ UD2 corresponding to TAG#1.
表6Table 6
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000015
例如,小区组信息与MT下行资源和DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表7所示。表7中对应关系的对应原理和表4相同,在此不赘述。For example, the correspondence between the cell group information and the protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 7 below. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 7 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
表7Table 7
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000017
再如,小区组信息与MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引的对应关系可如下表8所示。表8中对应关系的对应原理和表5相同,在此不赘述。For another example, the correspondence relationship between the cell group information and the index of the start symbol of the downlink resource available for the MT or the index of the end symbol of the downlink resource available for the MT may be shown in Table 8 below. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 8 is the same as that in Table 5, and will not be repeated here.
表8Table 8
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000018
因此,由于多个小区组信息可对应多个第一信息(DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差、DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数、MT可用上行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用上行资源的结束符号的索引),因此,可以根据多个小区组信息中每个小区组信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多套上行时域位置。Therefore, since multiple cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the start of the MT available uplink resource The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each cell group information in the multiple cell group information.
下面对第二信息为接收配置信息的情况进行介绍:The following describes the case where the second information is receiving configuration information:
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息时,DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差具体为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差,DU资源与MT资源进行切换的保护参数为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。在该可能的实现中,第一节点可基于多个接收配置信息中各个接收配置信息对应的第一信息,确定MT的多套下行时域位置。In a possible implementation, when the second information is receiving configuration information, the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the MT downlink resource, and the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource It is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT. The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT. In this possible implementation, the first node may determine the multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT based on the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
在NR中,不同接收配置信息的MT下行信号可能具有不同的到达时间,即MT具有不同的下行帧接收定时。或者说,IAB节点的MT接收具有不同接收配置信息的下行信号时可能用不同定时的接收窗。此时,如图17所示,IAB节点的MT下行资源和DU的下行/上行资源之间可能具有多个时间差,图17以DU资源为下行资源。因此,MT的多个接收配置信息可能对应MT下行资源与DU资源之间的多个时间差。进而,该多个接收配置信息可能对应MT下行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间进行切换的多个保护参数。并且该多个接收配置信息可能对应MT可用下行资源的多个起始符号或MT可用下行资源的多个结束符号。In NR, MT downlink signals with different reception configuration information may have different arrival times, that is, MTs have different downlink frame reception timings. In other words, the MT of the IAB node may use different timing reception windows when receiving downlink signals with different reception configuration information. At this time, as shown in Figure 17, there may be multiple time differences between the MT downlink resource of the IAB node and the downlink/uplink resource of the DU. Figure 17 uses the DU resource as the downlink resource. Therefore, multiple received configuration information of the MT may correspond to multiple time differences between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource. Furthermore, the multiple received configuration information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources (U/D). And the multiple received configuration information may correspond to multiple start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT or multiple end symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT.
例如,接收配置信息与MT下行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表9所示。表9中对应关系的对应原理和表3相同,在此不赘述。For example, the correspondence between the received configuration information and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 9 below. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 9 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
表9Table 9
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000019
再如,接收配置信息与MT下行资源和DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表10所示。表10中对应关系的对应原理和表3相同,在此不赘述。For another example, the corresponding relationship between the received configuration information and the protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 10 below. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 10 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
表10Table 10
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000020
再如,接收配置信息与MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引的对应关系可如下表11所示。表11中对应关系的对应原理和表4相同,在此不赘述。For another example, the correspondence between the received configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 11 below. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 11 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
表11Table 11
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000021
因此,由于多个接收配置信息可对应多个第一信息(DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差、DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数、MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引),因此,可以根据多个接收配置信息中每个接收配置信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多套下行时域位置。Therefore, because multiple received configuration information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the start of the downlink resource available to the MT The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource for the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
在一种可能的实现中,本申请的MT的多个接收配置信息为IAB节点的上级节点为MT配置的接收配置信息。例如,MT被配置了5个接收配置信息。其中,TCI-state#0~TCI-state#2是控制资源设置的接收配置信息。TCI-state#3和TCI-state#4是物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Share Channel,PDSCH)的接收配置信息。IAB节点的上级节点可以为IAB配置TCI-state#2和TCI-state#3用于对应第一信息。本申请的MT的多个接收配置信息可以指TCI-state#2和TCI-state#3。In a possible implementation, the multiple receiving configuration information of the MT of the present application is the receiving configuration information configured for the MT by the superior node of the IAB node. For example, the MT is configured with 5 receiving configuration information. Among them, TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#2 are receiving configuration information for controlling resource settings. TCI-state#3 and TCI-state#4 are physical downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Share Channel, PDSCH) reception configuration information. The upper-level node of the IAB node can configure TCI-state#2 and TCI-state#3 for the IAB to correspond to the first information. The multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#2 and TCI-state#3.
在一种可能的实现中,接收配置信息为MT被配置的控制资源设置的接收配置信息。例如,MT被配置了3个控制资源设置的接收配置信息。分别为TCI-state#0~TCI-state#2。本申请的MT的多个接收配置信息可以指TCI-state#0~TCI-state#2。In a possible implementation, the received configuration information is the received configuration information set by the control resource configured by the MT. For example, the MT is configured with 3 control resource settings to receive configuration information. They are TCI-state#0~TCI-state#2. The multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#2.
在一种可能的实现中,接收配置信息为MT被配置的PDSCH的接收配置信息。例如,MT被配置了4个控制资源设置的接收配置信息。分别为TCI-state#0~TCI-state#3。本申请的MT的多个接收配置信息可以指TCI-state#0~TCI-state#3。In a possible implementation, the received configuration information is the received configuration information of the PDSCH configured by the MT. For example, the MT is configured with 4 control resource settings to receive configuration information. They are TCI-state#0~TCI-state#3. The multiple receiving configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to TCI-state#0 to TCI-state#3.
在一种可能的实现中,MT的多个接收配置信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。即不同小区组信息可能对应的MT下行资源与DU资源之间不同的时间差,且同一小区组信息下的不同接收配置信息可能对应的MT下行资源与DU资源之间不同的时间差。进而,不同小区组信息可能对应的DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的不同保护参数,且同一小区组信息下的不同接收配置信息可能对应的DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的不同保护参数。不同小区组信息可能对应的MT可用下行资源的不同起始符号的索引,且同一小区组信息下的不同接收配置信息可能对应的MT可用下行资源的不同起始符号的索引。不同小区组信息可能对应的MT可用下行资源的不同结束符号的索引,且同一小区组信息下的不同接收 配置信息可能对应的MT可用下行资源的不同结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, the multiple reception configuration information of the MT corresponds to one cell group information of the MT. That is, different cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT downlink resources and DU resources. Furthermore, different protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT downlink resources that may correspond to different cell group information, and switching between DU resources and MT downlink resources that may correspond to different reception configuration information under the same cell group information Different protection parameters. Different cell group information may correspond to the indexes of different start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to the indexes of different start symbols of the available downlink resources of the MT. Different cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available downlink resources, and different reception configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available downlink resources.
例如,小区组信息、接收配置信息与MT下行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表12所示。下表12以小区组信息为TAG信息,接收配置信息为TCI-state信息为例。如下表12所示,MT被配置有2个TAG信息,分别为TAG#0和TAG#1。MT被配置有4个TCI-state信息,分别为TCI-state#0~TCI-state#3。MT下行资源与DU上行资源之间的时间差具有4个,分别为TAG#0和TCI-state#0对应的时间差Δ DU1,TAG#0和TCI-state#1对应的时间差Δ DU2,TAG#1和TCI-state#2对应的时间差Δ DU3,TAG#1和TCI-state#3对应的时间差Δ DU4。MT下行资源与DU下行资源之间的时间差对应原理相同,在此不赘述。 For example, the correspondence between the cell group information, the received configuration information, and the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 12 below. Table 12 below takes the cell group information as TAG information and the receiving configuration information as TCI-state information as an example. As shown in Table 12 below, the MT is configured with 2 TAG information, namely TAG#0 and TAG#1. The MT is configured with 4 TCI-state information, namely TCI-state#0~TCI-state#3. The time between the MT downlink resources DU uplink resource difference having 4, respectively TAG # time difference between 0 and TCI-state # 0 corresponding Δ DU1, TAG # time difference between 0 and TCI-state # 1 corresponding to Δ DU2, TAG # 1 and the time difference TCI-state # 2 corresponding Δ DU3, TAG # 1 and the time difference TCI-state # 3 corresponding Δ DU4. The corresponding principle of the time difference between the MT downlink resource and the DU downlink resource is the same, and will not be repeated here.
表12Table 12
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000022
再如,小区组信息、接收配置信息与MT下行资源与DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表13所示。For another example, the correspondence between cell group information, received configuration information, and protection parameters for switching between MT downlink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 13 below.
表13Table 13
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000023
再如,小区组信息、接收配置信息与MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引的对应关系可如下表14所示。For another example, the correspondence between the cell group information, the reception configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 14 below.
表14Table 14
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000025
因此,由于小区组信息对应的多个接收配置信息可对应多个第一信息(DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差、DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数、MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引),因此,可以根据多个接收配置信息中每个接收配置信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多套下行时域位置。Therefore, because the multiple reception configuration information corresponding to the cell group information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, and the MT available The index of the start symbol of the downlink resource or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT), therefore, multiple sets of downlink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each of the multiple received configuration information.
下面介绍第二信息为发送配置信息的情况:The following describes the case where the second information is sending configuration information:
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为发送配置信息时,DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差具体为时间差为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差,DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, when the second information is sending configuration information, the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is specifically the time difference between the DU resource and the MT uplink resource, and the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource is The protection parameter of the handover is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT. The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the MT's uplink available resources, or the symbol index information is the end symbol of the MT's uplink available resources. index of.
IAB节点MT在上行传输时,可被配置多个空间关系信息(SpatialRelationInfo),例如物理上行控制信道的空间关系信息(PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo)以及探测参考信号的空间关系信息(SRS-SpatialRelationInfo)。MT在配置了不同的SpatialRelationInfo时,上行传输定时可能存在偏差。因此,多个发送配置信息可能对应DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的多个时间差。进而多个发送配置信息可能对应MT上行资源和DU资源(U/D)之间进行切换的多个保护参数,多个发送配置信息可能对应MT可用上行资源的多个起始符号的索引或多个结束符号的索引。During uplink transmission, the IAB node MT can be configured with multiple spatial relationship information (SpatialRelationInfo), such as the spatial relationship information of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo) and the spatial relationship information of the sounding reference signal (SRS-SpatialRelationInfo). When the MT is configured with different SpatialRelationInfo, there may be deviations in the uplink transmission timing. Therefore, multiple sending configuration information may correspond to multiple time differences between DU resources and MT uplink resources. Furthermore, multiple transmission configuration information may correspond to multiple protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources (U/D), and multiple transmission configuration information may correspond to multiple index or multiple starting symbols of MT available uplink resources. The index of the ending symbol.
例如,发送配置信息与MT上行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表15所示。下表15以发送配置信息为空间关系信息为例。表15中对应关系的对应原理和表5相同,在此不赘述。For example, the correspondence between the sending configuration information and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be as shown in Table 15 below. The following table 15 takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example. The corresponding principle of the corresponding relationship in Table 15 is the same as that in Table 5, and will not be repeated here.
表15Table 15
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000026
再如,发送配置信息与MT下行资源和DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表15所示。下表16以发送配置信息为空间关系信息为例。表16中对应关系的对应原理和表3相同,在此不赘述。For another example, the correspondence between the transmission configuration information and the protection parameters for switching between the MT downlink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 15 below. Table 16 below takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example. The corresponding principle of the correspondence in Table 16 is the same as that in Table 3, and will not be repeated here.
表16Table 16
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000027
再如,发送配置信息与MT可用下行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用下行资源的结束 符号的索引的对应关系可如下表17所示。下表17以发送配置信息为空间关系信息为例。表17中对应关系的对应原理和表4相同,在此不赘述。For another example, the correspondence between the transmission configuration information and the index of the start symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available downlink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 17 below. Table 17 below takes the sending configuration information as spatial relationship information as an example. The corresponding principle of the correspondence in Table 17 is the same as that in Table 4, and will not be repeated here.
表17Table 17
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000028
因此,由于多个发送配置信息可对应多个第一信息(DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差、DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数、MT可用上行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用上行资源的结束符号的索引),因此,可以根据多个发送配置信息中每个发送配置信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多套上行时域位置。Therefore, since multiple transmission configuration information can correspond to multiple first information (the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, the start of the MT available uplink resource The index of the symbol or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT), therefore, the multiple sets of uplink time domain positions of the MT can be determined according to the first information corresponding to each transmission configuration information in the multiple transmission configuration information.
在一种可能的实现中,发送配置信息为通信设备的上级节点为MT配置的的发送配置信息。例如,MT被配置了5个发送配置信息。其中,SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#2是物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)的发送配置信息。SpatialRelationInfo#3和SpatialRelationInfo#4是探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)传输的发送配置信息。IAB节点的上级节点可以为IAB配置SpatialRelationInfo#2和SpatialRelationInfo#3用于对应第一信息。本申请的MT的多个发送配置信息可以指SpatialRelationInfo#2和SpatialRelationInfo#3。In a possible implementation, the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured for the MT by the upper node of the communication device. For example, the MT is configured with 5 sending configuration information. Among them, SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#2 are physical uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH) sending configuration information. SpatialRelationInfo#3 and SpatialRelationInfo#4 are transmission configuration information for sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) transmission. The superior node of the IAB node can configure SpatialRelationInfo#2 and SpatialRelationInfo#3 for the IAB to correspond to the first information. The multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#2 and SpatialRelationInfo#3.
或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的PUCCH的发送配置信息,例如,MT被配置了3个PUCCH的发送配置信息。分别为SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#2。本申请的MT的多个发送配置信息可以指SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#2。Or, the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the PUCCH configured by the MT. For example, the MT is configured with the transmission configuration information of 3 PUCCHs. They are SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#2. The multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#2.
或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的SRS的发送配置信息。例如,MT被配置了4个SRS的发送配置信息。分别为SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#3。本申请的MT的多个发送配置信息可以指SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#3。Or, the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the SRS configured by the MT. For example, the MT is configured with 4 SRS transmission configuration information. They are SpatialRelationInfo#0~SpatialRelationInfo#3. The multiple sending configuration information of the MT in this application may refer to SpatialRelationInfo#0 to SpatialRelationInfo#3.
在一种可能的实现中,MT的多个发送配置信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。即不同小区组信息可能对应的MT上行资源与DU资源之间不同的时间差,且同一小区组信息下的不同发送配置信息可能对应的MT上行资源与DU资源之间不同的时间差。进而,不同小区组信息可能对应的DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的不同保护参数,且同一小区组信息下的不同发送配置信息可能对应的DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的不同保护参数。不同小区组信息可能对应的MT可用上行资源的不同起始符号的索引,且同一小区组信息下的不同发送配置信息可能对应的MT可用上行资源的不同起始符号的索引。不同小区组信息可能对应的MT可用上行资源的不同结束符号的索引,且同一小区组信息下的不同发送配置信息可能对应的MT可用上行资源的不同结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, multiple transmission configuration information of the MT corresponds to one cell group information of the MT. That is, different cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different time differences between MT uplink resources and DU resources. Furthermore, different protection parameters for switching between DU resources and MT uplink resources that may correspond to different cell group information, and switching between DU resources and MT uplink resources that may correspond to different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information Different protection parameters. Different cell group information may correspond to different start symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different start symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources. Different cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources, and different transmission configuration information under the same cell group information may correspond to different end symbol indexes of MT available uplink resources.
例如,小区组信息、发送配置信息与MT上行资源与DU资源之间的时间差的对应关系可如下表18所示。For example, the correspondence relationship between the cell group information, the transmission configuration information, and the time difference between the MT uplink resource and the DU resource may be shown in Table 18 below.
表18Table 18
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000030
再如,小区组信息、发送配置信息与MT上行资源与DU资源之间进行切换的保护参数的对应关系可如下表19所示。For another example, the correspondence between cell group information, transmission configuration information, and protection parameters for switching between MT uplink resources and DU resources may be shown in Table 19 below.
表19Table 19
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000031
再如,小区组信息、发送配置信息与MT可用上行资源的起始符号的索引或MT可用上行资源的结束符号的索引的对应关系可如下表20所示。For another example, the correspondence relationship between the cell group information, the transmission configuration information, and the index of the start symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT or the index of the end symbol of the available uplink resource of the MT may be shown in Table 20 below.
表20Table 20
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2020119061-appb-000032
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点时,第一节点还需要确定MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。例如,如表3所示,第一节点可确定TAG#0对应的Δ DU1和TAG#1对应的Δ DU2。关于时间差的确定方式,可参见上述确定保护参数的方法中对应的描述,在此不赘述。第一节点确定Δ DU1和Δ DU2之后,可根据Δ DU1得到TAG#0对应的MT下行资源与DU上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,以及根据Δ DU2得到TAG#1对应的MT下行资源与DU上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数。第一节点根据TAG#0对应的保护参数可以确定第一套MT的下行时域位置。第一节点根据TAG#1对应的保护参数可以确定第二套MT的下行时域位置。 In a possible implementation, when the first node is an IAB node, the first node also needs to determine the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT. For example, as shown in Table 3, the first node may determine the TAG # 0 corresponding to TAG # 1 and Δ DU1 corresponding Δ DU2. Regarding the determination method of the time difference, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method for determining the protection parameter, which will not be repeated here. After the first node determines Δ DU1 and Δ DU2 , it can obtain the protection parameters for switching between the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 and the DU uplink resource according to Δ DU1 , and obtain the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 according to Δ DU2 and Protection parameters for switching between DU uplink resources. The first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the first set of MTs according to the protection parameters corresponding to TAG#0. The first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the second set of MTs according to the protection parameters corresponding to TAG#1.
再如,如表4所示,第一节点可确定TAG#0对应的MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数A1和TAG#1对应的MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数A2。第一节点根据TAG#0对应的保护参数A1可以确定第一套MT的下行时域位置。第一节点根据TAG#1对应的保护参数A2可以确定第二套MT的下行时域位置。For another example, as shown in Table 4, the first node may determine that the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#0 is switched to the protection parameter A1 of the DU uplink resource and the MT downlink resource corresponding to TAG#1 is switched to the protection parameter A2 of the DU uplink resource. The first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the first set of MTs according to the protection parameter A1 corresponding to TAG#0. The first node can determine the downlink time domain location of the second set of MTs according to the protection parameter A2 corresponding to TAG#1.
再如,第一节点可确定TCI-state#0对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引M1和TCI-state#1对应的MT可用下行资源的结束符号的索引M2。第一节点根据TCI-state#0对应的索引M1可以确定第一套MT的时域位置。第一节点根据TCI-state#1对应的索引M2可以确定第二套MT的时域位置。For another example, the first node may determine the index M1 of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TCI-state#0 and the index M2 of the end symbol of the MT available downlink resource corresponding to TCI-state#1. The first node can determine the time domain position of the first set of MTs according to the index M1 corresponding to TCI-state#0. The first node can determine the time domain position of the second set of MTs according to the index M2 corresponding to TCI-state#1.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点时,第一节点确定MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息之后,还需要向第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点上报指示信息,该指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。从而第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点接收该指示信息之后,就可根据多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多组时域位置。In a possible implementation, when the first node is an IAB node, after the first node determines the first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT, it also needs to report to the superior node or host of the first node. The node reports indication information, which is used to indicate the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information of the MT. Therefore, after the upper node or host node of the first node receives the indication information, it can determine the multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点时,第一节点还可接收IAB节点上报的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。第一节点接收该指示信息之后,就可根据多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息确定MT的多组时域位置。In a possible implementation, when the first node is the superior node or the host node of the IAB node, the first node may also receive the indication information reported by the IAB node. The indication information is used to indicate each of the multiple second information of the MT The first information corresponding to the second information. After the first node receives the indication information, it can determine the multiple sets of time domain positions of the MT according to the first information corresponding to each second information in the plurality of second information.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息时,该指示信息中具体可以包括接收配置信息的标识以及对应的第一信息。In a possible implementation, when the second information is receiving configuration information, the indication information may specifically include the identifier of the receiving configuration information and the corresponding first information.
例如,第一信息为时间差时,该指示信息的信元可以如下:For example, when the first information is a time difference, the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
MT-DU-timing-misalignment:MT-DU-timing-misalignment:
{{
Value;         //DU与MT的定时差,单位可为TcValue; // The timing difference between DU and MT, the unit can be Tc
Pattern;       //具体的转换图案,例如MT下行至DU下行的转换Pattern; // The specific conversion pattern, such as the conversion from MT downlink to DU downlink
CellGroupID;   //对应的小区组标识,例如TAG的标识,可以有多个取值CellGroupID;//The corresponding cell group ID, such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
TCI-stateId;   //对应的TCI标识,可以有多个取值TCI-stateId; // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
}}
在上述示例中,CellGroupID与TCI-stateId可仅有一个。In the above example, there may be only one CellGroupID and TCI-stateId.
再如,第一信息为保护符号数目时,该指示信息的信元可以如下:For another example, when the first information is the number of protection symbols, the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
MT-DU-guardsymbol-number:MT-DU-guardsymbol-number:
{{
Value;         //DU与MT的保护符号数目Value; // Number of protection symbols for DU and MT
Pattern;       //具体的转换图案,例如MT下行至DU下行的转换Pattern; // The specific conversion pattern, such as the conversion from MT downlink to DU downlink
CellGroupID;   //对应的小区组标识,例如TAG的标识,可以有多个取值CellGroupID;//The corresponding cell group ID, such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
TCI-stateId;   //对应的TCI标识,可以有多个取值TCI-stateId; // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
}}
在上述示例中,CellGroupID与TCI-stateId可仅有一个。In the above example, there may be only one CellGroupID and TCI-stateId.
再如,第一信息为MT可用下行资源的结束符号时,该指示信息的信元可以如下:For another example, when the first information is the end symbol of the available downlink resources of the MT, the information element of the indication information may be as follows:
MT-Start-end-symbol:MT-Start-end-symbol:
{{
value;         //MT的起止符号,可用SLIV(start and length indicator)表示value; // The start and end symbols of MT, which can be represented by SLIV (start and length indicator)
Pattern;       //具体的转换图案,例如MT下行至DU下行的转换Pattern; // The specific conversion pattern, such as the conversion from MT downlink to DU downlink
CellGroupID;   //对应的小区组标识,例如TAG的标识,可以有多个取值CellGroupID;//The corresponding cell group ID, such as the TAG ID, can have multiple values
TCI-stateId;   //对应的TCI标识,可以有多个取值TCI-stateId; // The corresponding TCI identifier, which can have multiple values
}}
下面对如何根据第一节点基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的资源可用性和MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息中的一项或多项来确定MT的多套时域位置进行具体描述。由于确定MT的每套时域位置的原理相同。因此下面以确定MT的一套时域位置为例,进行描述:The following is an explanation of how to use one of the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT based on the time domain location of the first node based on the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, the resource availability of the DU resource, and the second information of the MT. Multiple sets of time domain locations to determine the MT are described in detail. Because the principle of determining the time domain position of each set of MT is the same. Therefore, the following is an example to determine a set of MT's time domain position for description:
第一节点可以根据一段连续DU可用符号的第一个DU可用符号计算MT的最后一个可用符号,或根据一段连续DU可用符号的最后一个DU可用符号计算MT的第一个可用符号。应理解,DU的可用符号包括DU始终可用的符号,即DU的hard符号,还包括通过动态信令确定的DU可用符号,例如通过动态信令指示为可用的DU的soft符号。The first node may calculate the last usable symbol of the MT according to the first DU usable symbol of a section of continuous DU usable symbols, or calculate the first usable symbol of the MT according to the last DU usable symbol of a section of continuous DU usable symbols. It should be understood that the available symbols of the DU include symbols that are always available to the DU, that is, the hard symbols of the DU, and also include the available symbols of the DU determined through dynamic signaling, for example, the soft symbols of the DU indicated as available through dynamic signaling.
也就是,第一节点可以根据DU资源的结束符号的位置和第一信息确定位于DU资源后面的MT的起始符号的位置。例如,第一信息为b,b为DU资源切换至MT资源的保护符号的数量。第一节点确定位于MT的起始符号的位置在DU资源的结束符号之后、且与DU资源的结束符号之间间隔b个符号。再如,第一信息为f,f为DU资源切换至MT资源的可用符号偏移f。第一节点确定位于MT的起始符号的位置在DU资源的结束符号之后、且与DU资源的结束符号之间的偏移为f个符号。That is, the first node may determine the position of the start symbol of the MT located behind the DU resource according to the position of the end symbol of the DU resource and the first information. For example, the first information is b, and b is the number of protection symbols for switching from DU resources to MT resources. The first node determines that the position of the start symbol of the MT is after the end symbol of the DU resource and is separated by b symbols from the end symbol of the DU resource. For another example, the first information is f, and f is the available symbol offset f for switching the DU resource to the MT resource. The first node determines that the position of the start symbol of the MT is after the end symbol of the DU resource and is offset from the end symbol of the DU resource by f symbols.
第一节点可以根据DU资源的起始符号的位置和第一信息确定位于DU资源前面的MT资源的结束符号的位置。例如,第一信息为a,a为MT资源切换至DU资源的保护符号的数量。第一节点确定MT资源的结束符号在DU资源的起始符号之前、且与DU资源的起始符号之间间隔a个符号。再如,第一信息为e,e为MT资源切换至DU资源的可用符号偏移。第一节点确定位于MT的结束符号的位置在DU资源的起始符号之后、且与DU资源的起始符号之间的偏移为e个符号。The first node may determine the position of the end symbol of the MT resource located in front of the DU resource according to the position of the start symbol of the DU resource and the first information. For example, the first information is a, a is the number of protection symbols for switching the MT resource to the DU resource. The first node determines that the end symbol of the MT resource is before the start symbol of the DU resource and is separated by a symbols from the start symbol of the DU resource. For another example, the first information is e, and e is the available symbol offset for switching the MT resource to the DU resource. The first node determines that the position of the end symbol of the MT is after the start symbol of the DU resource and the offset from the start symbol of the DU resource is e symbols.
其中,如果第一信息为时间差,则第一节点需要根据时间差确定保护参数,再根据保护参数来确定MT的可用时域位置。Wherein, if the first information is the time difference, the first node needs to determine the protection parameter according to the time difference, and then determine the available time domain position of the MT according to the protection parameter.
如果第一信息为MT可用资源的起始符号的索引,则第一节点可基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型和各个第二信息对应的MT可用资源的起始符号来确定MT的多套时域位置。例如,第一节点可根据DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型确定MT可用资源的多个起始符号分别所在的时隙,从而确定MT的多套可用时域位置。If the first information is the index of the start symbol of the MT available resource, the first node can determine the MT based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the start symbol of the MT available resource corresponding to each second information. Multiple sets of time domain positions. For example, the first node may determine the time slots in which the multiple start symbols of the MT available resources are respectively located according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the resource type of the DU resource, thereby determining multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT.
如果第一信息为MT可用资源的结束符号的索引,则第一节点可基于DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型和各个第二信息对应的MT可用资源的结束符号来确定MT的多套时域位置。例如,第一节点可根据DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型确定MT可用资源的多个结束符号分别所在的时隙,从而确定MT的多套可用时域位置。If the first information is the index of the end symbol of the MT available resource, the first node can determine the number of MT based on the time domain location of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the end symbol of the MT available resource corresponding to each second information. Set the time domain position. For example, the first node may determine the time slots in which the multiple end symbols of the MT available resources are respectively located according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the resource type of the DU resource, thereby determining multiple sets of available time domain locations of the MT.
第一节点可通过以下方法获取IAB节点的DU hard符号的时域位置或索引:IAB节点的宿主节点为IAB节点配置DU的hard/soft资源类型。或者,IAB节点DU的特殊信号或信道来发送或接收资源,被转换为DU hard资源,特殊信号或信道可以但不限于包括同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB),随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH),周期性信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS),发送系统消息 1(system information block 1,SIB1)的广播信道等。在一种可能的实现中,特殊信号可以为DU的小区级信号或信道。The first node can obtain the time domain position or index of the DU hard symbol of the IAB node by the following method: the host node of the IAB node configures the hard/soft resource type of the DU for the IAB node. Or, the special signal or channel of the IAB node DU is used to send or receive resources, and is converted into DU hard resource. The special signal or channel can include but is not limited to synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB), random access channel (random access) channel, RACH), periodic channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), broadcast channel for sending system message 1 (system information block 1, SIB1), etc. In a possible implementation, the special signal may be a cell-level signal or channel of the DU.
当特殊信号所占用资源被视作hard资源时,IAB节点和其上级节点均需要获知该特殊信号的时域位置。因此,donor节点需要向IAB节点的上级节点发送IAB节点DU的特殊信号配置信息。例如,donor节点向IAB节点的上级节点发送该IAB节点DU的SSB配置信息,PRACH配置信息,以及SIB1-PDCCH配置信息等。When the resource occupied by a special signal is regarded as a hard resource, both the IAB node and its superior node need to know the time domain location of the special signal. Therefore, the donor node needs to send the special signal configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node. For example, the donor node sends the SSB configuration information, PRACH configuration information, and SIB1-PDCCH configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node.
IAB节点DU发送CSI-RS或接收SR(scheduling request,调度请求)所占用资源也可能被IAB节点和上级节点视作hard资源,然而由于IAB节点DU可能频繁配置和重配置用户级的CSI-RS和SR等,donor节点可能无法将所有CSI-RS和SR配置信息发送至IAB节点的上级节点。The resources occupied by the IAB node DU sending CSI-RS or receiving SR (scheduling request) may also be regarded as hard resources by the IAB node and higher-level nodes. However, because the IAB node DU may frequently configure and reconfigure user-level CSI-RS And SR, etc., the donor node may not be able to send all the CSI-RS and SR configuration information to the superior node of the IAB node.
为解决上述技术问题,donor节点可以将部分CSI-RS或SR所占用资源视作IAB节点DU的hard资源。In order to solve the above technical problems, the donor node can regard part of the resources occupied by the CSI-RS or SR as hard resources of the IAB node DU.
下面以CSI-RS为例进行具体的说明,但该方案也可应用于SR或其余IAB节点DU的收发信号,例如周期性物理上行控制信道PUCCH,跟踪参考信号(Tracking Reference Signal,TRS)。The following takes CSI-RS as an example for specific description, but this solution can also be applied to SR or other IAB node DUs to receive and send signals, such as periodic physical uplink control channel PUCCH, tracking reference signal (Tracking Reference Signal, TRS).
如果仅部分CSI-RS所占用资源被视作hard资源,则IAB节点和其上级节点需要对这部分资源具有一致理解。也就是说,上级节点和IAB节点均需要获知被视作hard资源的CSI-RS资源配置信息。If only part of the resources occupied by the CSI-RS are regarded as hard resources, the IAB node and its superior nodes need to have a consistent understanding of this part of the resources. In other words, both the upper-level node and the IAB node need to know the CSI-RS resource configuration information that is regarded as a hard resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,donor节点将IAB节点DU的部分CSI-RS配置信息发送给IAB节点的上级节点,且Donor节点也将这部分CSI-RS的配置信息或标识信息发送给IAB节点,如此一来,IAB节点和上级节点均可获知哪些CSI-RS资源被视作了hard资源。其中,CSI-RS配置信息可以包括CSI-RS时域信息、频域信息、周期信息等配置信息。In a possible implementation, the donor node sends part of the CSI-RS configuration information of the IAB node DU to the superior node of the IAB node, and the Donor node also sends this part of the CSI-RS configuration information or identification information to the IAB node In this way, both the IAB node and the upper-level node can learn which CSI-RS resources are regarded as hard resources. Among them, the CSI-RS configuration information may include configuration information such as CSI-RS time domain information, frequency domain information, and period information.
可选地,IAB节点可向donor节点上报部分CSI-RS配置信息,请求donor节点将这部分CSI-RS所占用的资源视作为hard。在上报部分CSI-RS信息后,IAB节点将上报的这部分CSI-RS资源视作hard资源。其中,上报部分CSI-RS配置信息可以是通过指示这部分CSI-RS时频域资源的方式,也可以通过指示这部分CSI-RS索引或列表的方式。Optionally, the IAB node may report part of the CSI-RS configuration information to the donor node, requesting the donor node to regard the resources occupied by this part of the CSI-RS as hard. After reporting part of the CSI-RS information, the IAB node regards the reported part of CSI-RS resources as hard resources. Wherein, reporting part of CSI-RS configuration information may be by indicating this part of CSI-RS time-frequency domain resources, or by indicating this part of CSI-RS index or list.
可选地,donor节点可以向IAB节点发送确认信息,该确认信息指示上报的CSI-RS资源是否被视作hard资源,或哪些CSI-RS资源可被视作hard资源。应理解,donor节点所确认的部分CSI-RS资源可以不等同于IAB节点所上报的部分CSI-RS资源。Optionally, the donor node may send confirmation information to the IAB node, the confirmation information indicating whether the reported CSI-RS resources are regarded as hard resources, or which CSI-RS resources can be regarded as hard resources. It should be understood that part of the CSI-RS resources confirmed by the donor node may not be equal to the part of the CSI-RS resources reported by the IAB node.
可选地,Donor节点将IAB节点上报的部分或全部CSI-RS资源信息发送至IAB节点的上级节点,指示这部分CSI-RS资源会被视作hard资源。Optionally, the Donor node sends part or all of the CSI-RS resource information reported by the IAB node to the upper-level node of the IAB node, indicating that this part of the CSI-RS resources will be regarded as hard resources.
当上述部分CSI-RS资源被视作hard资源后,IAB节点和其上级节点可以按照前述或者下文所述实施例方案进行保护符号的插入。After the above-mentioned part of the CSI-RS resources are regarded as hard resources, the IAB node and its upper-level node can insert the protection symbols according to the foregoing or following embodiment schemes.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例所提供的资源确定方法,下面结合实际的例子进行详细说明。In order to better understand the resource determination method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the following detailed description will be given in conjunction with actual examples.
场景一:第一节点根据DU hard资源的边界符号以及保护符号数量确定MT可用符号的结束位置。Scenario 1: The first node determines the end position of the available symbols for the MT according to the boundary symbols of the DU hard resource and the number of protection symbols.
举例来说,第一节点确定TCI-state#0对应的A1(即MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源 的保护参数)和TCI-state#1对应的A2(即MT下行资源切换至DU上行资源的保护参数)。第一节点根据DU资源的时域位置和DU资源的类型和性质,确定DU的第一个上行hard符号。如图18所示,DU的第一个上行hard符号为时隙1的符号4。如果A1和A2为保护符号的数量a,A1等于1,A2等于2。那么,可以确定第一套MT的时域位置的可用符号结束位置为时隙1的符号2,可以确定第二套MT的时域位置的可用符号结束位置为时隙1的符号1。第一套MT的时域位置对应TCI-state#0,TCI-state#0对应的传输在第一套MT的时域位置进行。第二套MT的时域位置对应TCI-state#1,TCI-state#1对应的传输在第二套MT的时域位置进行。For example, the first node determines A1 corresponding to TCI-state#0 (that is, the protection parameter for switching MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources) and A2 corresponding to TCI-state#1 (that is, the switching of MT downlink resources to DU uplink resources). Protection parameters). The first node determines the first uplink hard symbol of the DU according to the time domain location of the DU resource and the type and nature of the DU resource. As shown in Figure 18, the first uplink hard symbol of the DU is symbol 4 of time slot 1. If A1 and A2 are the number a of protection symbols, A1 is equal to 1, and A2 is equal to 2. Then, it can be determined that the available symbol end position of the time domain position of the first set of MTs is symbol 2 of time slot 1, and it can be determined that the available symbol end position of the time domain location of the second set of MTs is symbol 1 of time slot 1. The time domain position of the first set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#0, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#0 is performed at the time domain position of the first set of MT. The time domain position of the second set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#1, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#1 is performed at the time domain position of the second set of MT.
在一种可能的实现中,场景一中对DU hard资源的描述也适用于被动态确定为可用的DU soft资源。In a possible implementation, the description of DU hard resources in scenario 1 is also applicable to DU soft resources that are dynamically determined to be available.
场景二:第一节点根据DU hard资源的边界符号以及DU资源的起始符号的索引与MT资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差确定MT可用符号的结束位置。Scenario 2: The first node determines the end position of the MT available symbol according to the boundary symbol of the DU hard resource and the deviation between the index of the start symbol of the DU resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT resource.
再举例来说,A1和A2为DU上行资源的起始符号的索引与MT下行资源的结束符号的索引之间的偏差e,A1等于1,A2等于2。如图19所示,DU的第一个上行hard符号为时隙1的符号4。那么,可以确定第一套MT的时域位置的可用符号结束位置为时隙1的符号3,可以确定第二套MT的时域位置的可用符号结束位置为时隙1的符号2。第一套MT的时域位置对应TCI-state#0,TCI-state#0对应的传输在第一套MT的时域位置进行。第二套MT的时域位置对应TCI-state#1,TCI-state#1对应的传输在第二套MT的时域位置进行。For another example, A1 and A2 are the deviation e between the index of the start symbol of the DU uplink resource and the index of the end symbol of the MT downlink resource, A1 is equal to 1, and A2 is equal to 2. As shown in Figure 19, the first uplink hard symbol of the DU is symbol 4 of time slot 1. Then, it can be determined that the available symbol end position of the time domain position of the first set of MT is symbol 3 of time slot 1, and it can be determined that the available symbol end position of the time domain location of the second set of MT is symbol 2 of time slot 1. The time domain position of the first set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#0, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#0 is performed at the time domain position of the first set of MT. The time domain position of the second set of MT corresponds to TCI-state#1, and the transmission corresponding to TCI-state#1 is performed at the time domain position of the second set of MT.
在一种可能的实现中,场景二中对DU hard资源的描述也适用于被动态确定为可用的DU soft资源。In a possible implementation, the description of DU hard resources in scenario 2 is also applicable to DU soft resources that are dynamically determined to be available.
在一种可能的实现中,IAB节点的DU具有多个小区(cell),不同的DU小区可能具有不同的DU资源配置或DU可用资源时域位置。此时,确定MT的时域资源需要考虑多个DU小区的资源配置。此外,不同MT小区组对应的第一信息(即时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息)可对应于MT小区组与不同DU小区之间的切换。例如,假设MT的小区组1对应的保护参数和MT的小区组2对应的保护参数不相同。其中,MT小区组1对应的保护参数表示MT小区组1与DU小区组A之间切换的保护参数,而MT小区组2的保护参数表示MT小区组2与DU小区组B之间切换的保护参数。可选的,同一个MT小区与不同的DU小区也可能具有不同的保护参数,其确定与上报方法与上述实施例类似,不再赘述。第二信息可以为MT小区(或分量载波)与DU小区的组合。In a possible implementation, the DU of the IAB node has multiple cells (cells), and different DU cells may have different DU resource configurations or time domain locations of available DU resources. At this time, to determine the time domain resources of the MT, the resource configuration of multiple DU cells needs to be considered. In addition, the first information (ie, time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information) corresponding to different MT cell groups may correspond to handover between the MT cell group and different DU cells. For example, suppose that the protection parameters corresponding to the cell group 1 of the MT are different from the protection parameters corresponding to the cell group 2 of the MT. Among them, the protection parameter corresponding to MT cell group 1 represents the protection parameter of handover between MT cell group 1 and DU cell group A, and the protection parameter of MT cell group 2 represents the protection of handover between MT cell group 2 and DU cell group B. parameter. Optionally, the same MT cell and different DU cells may also have different protection parameters, and the determination and reporting methods are similar to those in the foregoing embodiment, and will not be repeated. The second information may be a combination of MT cell (or component carrier) and DU cell.
可见,通过实施图15所描述的方法,能够准确地确定回传链路的时域资源。It can be seen that by implementing the method described in FIG. 15, the time domain resources of the backhaul link can be accurately determined.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二信息还包括保护符号的子载波间隔信息和/或循环前缀(cyclic prefix,CP)类型信息。示例性地,对于低于6GHz以下的低频段来说,子载波间隔的取值包括15kHz或30kHz或60kHz,而对于6GHz以上(包括6Ghz)的高频段,子载波间隔的取值包括60kHz或120kHz或240kHz。In a possible implementation manner, the second information further includes sub-carrier spacing information of the guard symbols and/or cyclic prefix (CP) type information. Exemplarily, for the low frequency band below 6GHz, the value of the subcarrier spacing includes 15kHz or 30kHz or 60kHz, and for the high frequency band above 6GHz (including 6Ghz), the value of the subcarrier spacing includes 60kHz or 120kHz. Or 240kHz.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点请求第一节点上报第一信息,上级节点或宿主节点在请求第一节点上报第一信息时,可携带部分或全部第二信息。例如,上级节点或宿主节点在请求信令中携带第一节点MT的小区标识和/或第一节点DU的小区标识。或者,上级节点或宿主节点在请求信令中携带保护符号的子载波间隔信息和/或CP类型。In a possible implementation, the superior node or host node of the first node requests the first node to report the first information, and the superior node or host node may carry part or all of the second information when requesting the first node to report the first information. information. For example, the upper node or the donor node carries the cell identity of the first node MT and/or the cell identity of the first node DU in the request signaling. Alternatively, the upper-level node or the host node carries the protection symbol sub-carrier spacing information and/or CP type in the request signaling.
示例性的,上级节点或宿主节点在请求信令可携带如下信息:Exemplarily, the upper-level node or host node may carry the following information in the request signaling:
GuardSymbol-reporting-trigger:GuardSymbol-reporting-trigger:
{{
ServCellIndex;   //MT小区ID,可能包含一个或多个值ServCellIndex; //MT cell ID, which may contain one or more values
DUCellIndex;      //DU小区ID,可能包含一个或多个值DUCellIndex; // DU cell ID, which may contain one or more values
SubcarrierSpacing; //保护符号的子载波间隔SubcarrierSpacing;//The subcarrier spacing of the protection symbol
}}
在第一节点收到上述请求信令后,基于请求信令中的第二信息上报第一信息,例如,基于请求信令中提供的子载波间隔信息上报保护符号数目。After receiving the above request signaling, the first node reports the first information based on the second information in the request signaling, for example, reports the number of protection symbols based on the subcarrier interval information provided in the request signaling.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,上级节点或宿主节点向第一节点发送第一信息,例如,上级节点或宿主节点向第一节点配置保护符号数目信息。上级节点或宿主节点配置的保护符号数目信息表示上级节点或宿主节点在进行回传链路传输时所采用的保护符号数目。In another possible implementation manner, the upper-level node or the host node sends the first information to the first node, for example, the upper-level node or the host node configures the protection symbol number information to the first node. The information about the number of protection symbols configured by the upper-level node or the host node indicates the number of protection symbols used by the upper-level node or the host node during backhaul link transmission.
可选的,上级节点或宿主节点在配置保护符号数目信息时,也可携带部分或全部第二信息。Optionally, when the upper-level node or the host node configures the protection symbol number information, it may also carry part or all of the second information.
示例性的,上级节点或宿主节点在发送保护符号数目信息时可携带如下信息:Exemplarily, the upper-level node or host node may carry the following information when sending information about the number of protection symbols:
GuardSymbol-config:GuardSymbol-config:
{{
ServCellIndex;   //MT小区ID,可能包含一个或多个值ServCellIndex; //MT cell ID, which may contain one or more values
DUCellIndex;      //DU小区ID,可能包含一个或多个值DUCellIndex; // DU cell ID, which may contain one or more values
SubcarrierSpacing;//保护符号的子载波间隔SubcarrierSpacing;//The subcarrier spacing of the protection symbol
Value 0;     //MT上行至DU上行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 0; // MT uplink to DU uplink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 1;     //MT上行至DU下行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 1; // MT uplink to DU downlink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 2;     //MT下行至DU上行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 2; // MT downlink to DU uplink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 3;     //MT下行至DU下行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 3; // MT downlink to DU downlink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 4;     //DU上行至MT上行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 4; // DU uplink to MT uplink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 5;     //DU上行至MT下行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 5; // DU uplink to MT downlink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 6;     //DU下行至MT上行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 6; // DU downlink to MT uplink switching corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
Value 7;     //DU下行至MT下行切换对应的保护符号数目信息 Value 7; // DU downlink to MT downlink handover corresponding to the number of protection symbols information
}}
在经过第一节点的上报第一信息之后和上级节点或宿主节点的配置之后,第一节点和第一节点的上级节点可具有两套保护符号信息,其中一套为上报值,而另一套为配置值。After reporting the first information by the first node and after the configuration of the superior node or the host node, the first node and the superior node of the first node may have two sets of protection symbol information, one of which is the reported value, and the other is Is the configuration value.
在一种可能的实现中,配置值覆盖上报值,即上报值是配置值的子集。In one possible implementation, the configuration value overrides the reported value, that is, the reported value is a subset of the configuration value.
在另一种可能的实现中,上报值和配置值分别应用于不同的场景。例如,对于由资源配置信息得到DU hard资源或根据动态指示信令得到的DU可用资源,第一节点和上级节点根据配置的保护符号数目信息确定MT资源;而对于由IAB节点DU的小区级信号所转换的DU hard资源,第一节点和上级节点根据上报的保护符号数目信息确定MT资源。In another possible implementation, the reported value and the configuration value are respectively applied to different scenarios. For example, for DU hard resources obtained from resource configuration information or DU available resources obtained according to dynamic indication signaling, the first node and the upper node determine the MT resource according to the information about the number of configured protection symbols; and for the cell-level signal from the IAB node DU For the converted DU hard resource, the first node and the upper-level node determine the MT resource according to the information about the number of protected symbols reported.
上述对MT资源与DU上行资源/下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数的确定方法进行了介绍,下面对MT资源与DU灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的确定方法进行介绍。The method for determining protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU uplink resources/downlink resources is described above, and the method for determining protection parameters for switching between MT resources and DU flexible resources is described below.
请参见20,20为本申请提供的一种资源确定方法的流程图,该方法包括:Please refer to 20, 20 for a flowchart of a resource determination method provided by this application. The method includes:
2001、第一节点确定第一信息。In 2001, the first node determines the first information.
其中,该第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数,该第一保护参数为IAB节点的MT资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数。也就是说,第一节点确定第一保护参数。或者,第一节点确定第二保护参数。或者,第一节点确定第一保护参数和第二保护参数。Wherein, the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter, the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the uplink resource of the DU, and the second protection parameter is the MT resource and the DU. The protection parameters for handover of downlink resources. That is, the first node determines the first protection parameter. Or, the first node determines the second protection parameter. Alternatively, the first node determines the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
其中,IAB节点的MT资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数可以为MT资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。关于这三种保护参数的具体介绍可参见上述保护参数确定方法中对应的描述,在此不赘述。Among them, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the uplink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU. For the specific introduction of these three protection parameters, please refer to the corresponding description in the above-mentioned protection parameter determination method, which will not be repeated here.
其中,IAB节点的MT资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数可以为MT资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。关于这三种保护参数的具体介绍可参见上述保护参数确定方法中对应的描述,在此不赘述。Among them, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource of the IAB node and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU, and the number of protection symbols for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU. Or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU. For the specific introduction of these three protection parameters, please refer to the corresponding description in the above-mentioned protection parameter determination method, which will not be repeated here.
其中,第一节点可以为IAB节点本身。或者,第一节点也可以为该IAB节点的上级节点或者宿主节点。具体实施中,该IAB节点可以是网络设备,例如中继设备,也可以是IAB节点。或者IAB节点可以是终端设备,例如UE中继等。或者IAB节点也可以是其他的需要和其他IAB节点进行数据回传的IAB节点等等,这里不做具体限定。Among them, the first node may be the IAB node itself. Alternatively, the first node may also be an upper node or host node of the IAB node. In specific implementation, the IAB node may be a network device, such as a relay device, or it may be an IAB node. Or the IAB node may be a terminal device, such as a UE relay. Or the IAB node may also be other IAB nodes that need to return data with other IAB nodes, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
2001、第一节点根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。2001. The first node determines, according to the first information, a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
其中,DU的灵活资源指该资源可以用于上行传输或者下行传输。具体地,第一节点确定第一信息之后,根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。Among them, the flexible resource of the DU means that the resource can be used for uplink transmission or downlink transmission. Specifically, after determining the first information, the first node determines the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information.
例如,以确定MT的下行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为例。第一节点获取的第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数。第一保护参数为MT的下行资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT的下行资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数。For example, to determine the protection parameters for switching between the downlink resources of the MT and the flexible resources of the DU as an example. The first information acquired by the first node includes the first protection parameter and/or the second protection parameter. The first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU, and the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
MT的下行资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的第一保护参数可以为MT的下行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT的下行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT的下行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。The first protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU. The number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the downlink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU.
MT的下行资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的第二保护参数可以为MT的下行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT的下行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT的下行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。The second protection parameter for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the downlink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU. The number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the downlink resources of the MT and the downlink resources of the DU.
其中,若确定MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护参数。那么第一保护参数为MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护参数。若确定DU的灵活资源切换至MT的下行资源的保护参数。那么第一保护参数为DU的上行资源切换至MT的下行资源的保护参数,第二保护参数为DU的下行资源切换至MT的下行资源的保护参数。Among them, if it is determined that the downlink resource of the MT is switched to the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the DU. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU. If it is determined that the flexible resource of the DU is switched to the protection parameter of the downlink resource of the MT. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the uplink resource of the DU to the downlink resource of the MT, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the downlink resource of the DU to the downlink resource of the MT.
第一节点根据第一保护参数和第二保护参数确定MT下行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the MT downlink resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
再如,以确定MT的上行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为例。第一节点获取的第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数。第一保护参数为MT的上行资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT的上行资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数。Another example is to determine the protection parameters for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the flexible resources of the DU as an example. The first information acquired by the first node includes the first protection parameter and/or the second protection parameter. The first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the uplink resource of the DU, and the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU.
MT的上行资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的第一保护参数可以为MT的上行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT的上行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT的上行资源与DU的上行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。The first protection parameter for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU may be the protection interval for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU. The number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the uplink resources of the DU.
MT的上行资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的第二保护参数可以为MT的上行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护间隔、MT的上行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的保护符号的数量或者MT的上行资源与DU的下行资源之间进行切换的可用符号索引偏差。The second protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU may be the guard interval for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU, and the protection for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the downlink resource of the DU. The number of symbols or the available symbol index deviation for switching between the uplink resources of the MT and the downlink resources of the DU.
其中,若确定MT的上行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护参数。那么第一保护参数为MT的上行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护参数,第二保护参数为MT的上行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护参数。若确定DU的灵活资源切换至MT的上行资源的保护参数。那么第一保护参数为DU的上行资源切换至MT的上行资源的保护参数,第二保护参数为DU的下行资源切换至MT的上行资源的保护参数。Among them, if it is determined that the uplink resource of the MT is switched to the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the DU. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU. If it is determined that the flexible resource of the DU is switched to the protection parameter of the uplink resource of the MT. Then the first protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the uplink resource of the DU to the uplink resource of the MT, and the second protection parameter is the protection parameter of switching the downlink resource of the DU to the uplink resource of the MT.
第一节点根据第一保护参数和第二保护参数确定MT的上行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点具体获取第一保护参数和第二保护参数,MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为第一保护参数和第二保护参数中的最大值。In a possible implementation, the first node specifically obtains the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护间隔为T1,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护间隔为T2。若保护间隔T1大于保护间隔T2。第一节点可将保护间隔T1确定为MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护间隔。For example, the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is T1, and the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is T2. If the guard interval T1 is greater than the guard interval T2. The first node may determine the guard interval T1 as the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU.
再举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护符号的数量为2,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护符号的数量为1。第一节点可确定MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护符号的数量为2。For another example, the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is 2, and the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is 1. The first node may determine that the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU is 2.
再举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的可用符号索引偏差为3,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的可用符号索引偏差为2。第一节点可确定MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的可用符号索引偏差为3。For another example, the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the downlink resource of the DU is 3, and the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the uplink resource of the DU is 2. The first node may determine that the available symbol index deviation of the MT's downlink resource switching to the DU's flexible resource is 3.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点具体获取第一保护参数和第二保护参数,MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为第一保护参数和第二保护参数中的最小值。In a possible implementation, the first node specifically obtains the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the minimum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护间隔为T1,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护间隔为T2。若保护间隔T1大于保护间隔T2。第一节点可将保护间隔T2确定为MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护间隔。For example, the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is T1, and the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is T2. If the guard interval T1 is greater than the guard interval T2. The first node may determine the guard interval T2 as the guard interval for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU.
再举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护符号的数量为2,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护符号的数量为1。第一节点可确定MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护符号的数量为1。For another example, the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the downlink resource of the DU is 2, and the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the uplink resource of the DU is 1. The first node may determine that the number of protection symbols for switching the downlink resource of the MT to the flexible resource of the DU is one.
再举例来说,MT的下行资源切换至DU的下行资源的可用符号索引偏差为3,MT的下行资源切换至DU的上行资源的可用符号索引偏差为2。第一节点可确定MT的下行资源切换至DU的灵活资源的可用符号索引偏差为2。For another example, the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the downlink resource of the DU is 3, and the available symbol index deviation of the downlink resource of the MT switched to the uplink resource of the DU is 2. The first node may determine that the available symbol index deviation of the MT's downlink resource switching to the DU's flexible resource is 2.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点可确定DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型;如果假设资源类型为上行。那么第一节点获取第一保护参数(即MT资源与DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数),并确定第一保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。如果假设资源类型为下行。那么第一节点获取第二保护参数(即MT资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数),并确定第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, the first node may determine the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU; if the hypothetical resource type is uplink. Then the first node obtains the first protection parameter (that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the uplink resource of the DU), and determines that the first protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU. If it is assumed that the resource type is downlink. Then the first node obtains the second protection parameter (that is, the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU), and determines that the second protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
其中,该假设资源类型是指假设的DU灵活资源的类型。例如,第一节点可以假设DU灵活资源的起始符号为上行符号。DU灵活资源的结束符号为下行符号。那么,第一节点确定MT资源切换至DU的上行资源的保护参数为MT资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护参数。第一节点确定DU的下行资源切换至MT资源的保护参数为DU的灵活资源切换至MT资源的保护参数。Among them, the hypothetical resource type refers to the hypothetical DU flexible resource type. For example, the first node may assume that the start symbol of the DU flexible resource is an uplink symbol. The end symbol of the DU flexible resource is a downlink symbol. Then, the first node determines that the protection parameter of the uplink resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU is the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU. The first node determines that the protection parameter for switching the downlink resource of the DU to the MT resource is the protection parameter for switching the flexible resource of the DU to the MT resource.
或者,第一节点可以假设DU灵活资源的起始符号为下行符号。DU灵活资源的结束符号为上行符号。那么,第一节点确定MT资源切换至DU的下行资源的保护参数为MT资源切换至DU的灵活资源的保护参数。第一节点确定DU的上行资源切换至MT资源的保护参数为DU的灵活资源切换至MT资源的保护参数。Alternatively, the first node may assume that the start symbol of the DU flexible resource is a downlink symbol. The end symbol of the DU flexible resource is an uplink symbol. Then, the first node determines that the protection parameter of the downlink resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU is the protection parameter of the flexible resource of the MT resource being switched to the DU. The first node determines that the protection parameter for switching the uplink resource of the DU to the MT resource is the protection parameter for switching the flexible resource of the DU to the MT resource.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点自身时,假设资源类型可以是IAB节点自己假设的。第一节点还可向第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点上报DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。从而第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点可以根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型确定MT的上行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, when the first node is the IAB node itself, the assumed resource type can be assumed by the IAB node itself. The first node may also report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node of the first node. Therefore, the upper node or the host node of the first node can determine the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可选的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点时,第一节点还可接收IAB节点上报的DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。第一节点根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型确定MT的上行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In an optional implementation, when the first node is the superior node or the host node of the IAB node, the first node may also receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the IAB node. The first node determines the protection parameter for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点自身时,第一节点接收第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点发送的配置信息,该配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型可以由IAB节点的上级节点或者宿主节点为IAB节点配置。In a possible implementation, when the first node is the IAB node itself, the first node receives the configuration information sent by the superior node or the host node of the first node, and the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. The hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU can be configured by the superior node or the host node of the IAB node for the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点时,第一节点还可向IAB节点发送配置信息,该配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。从而IAB节点可以根据DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型确定MT的上行资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。其中,上级节点或宿主节点可分别配置DU的灵活资源的起始符号的假设资源类型和灵活资源的结束符号的假设资源类型。In a possible implementation, when the first node is the superior node or host node of the IAB node, the first node may also send configuration information to the IAB node, where the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Therefore, the IAB node can determine the protection parameters for switching between the uplink resource of the MT and the flexible resource of the DU according to the assumed resource type of the flexible resource of the DU. Wherein, the superior node or the host node can respectively configure the hypothetical resource type of the start symbol of the flexible resource and the hypothetical resource type of the end symbol of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一节点为IAB节点自身时,IAB节点确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数之后,还可向上级节点或宿主节点上报MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。In a possible implementation, when the first node is the IAB node itself, after the IAB node determines the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU, it can also report the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node. Protection parameters for switching.
可见,通过实施20所描述的方法,能够准确地确定出MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。It can be seen that by implementing the method described in 20, the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU can be accurately determined.
基于与方法实施例的同一技术构思,本申请实施例提供一种资源确定装置。本申请中对于方法的描述,同样适用于装置部分。资源确定装置具体可以用于实现图15至图19的实施例中第一节点执行的方法,该装置可以是第一节点本身,也可以是第一节点中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分,其中,第一节点可以是IAB节点,也可以是IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点。该装置的结构可以如图21所示,包括处理单元2101以及存储单元2102。其中:Based on the same technical concept as the method embodiment, the embodiment of the present application provides a resource determination device. The description of the method in this application also applies to the device part. The resource determination device can be specifically used to implement the method executed by the first node in the embodiments of FIG. 15 to FIG. 19. The device may be the first node itself, or the chip or chipset in the first node or the chip used in the chip. Perform part of the function of the related method, where the first node can be an IAB node, or an upper node or host node of the IAB node. The structure of the device may be as shown in FIG. 21, including a processing unit 2101 and a storage unit 2102. among them:
存储单元2102,用于存储代码指令;The storage unit 2102 is used to store code instructions;
处理单元2101,用于调用存储单元2102存储的代码指令执行:The processing unit 2101 is used to call the code stored in the storage unit 2102 to execute:
确定通信设备的分布单元DU资源的时域位置;Determine the time domain location of the DU resource of the distribution unit of the communication device;
确定通信设备的移动终端MT的多套时域位置,MT的多套时域位置与以下信息中的一 项或多项有关:DU资源的时域位置、DU资源的资源类型、DU资源的资源性质、DU的动态资源指示信息、MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息,该第二信息包括接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息;Determine multiple sets of time-domain positions of the mobile terminal MT of the communication device. The multiple sets of time-domain positions of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time-domain position of the DU resource, the resource type of the DU resource, and the resource of the DU resource Properties, dynamic resource indication information of the DU, and first information corresponding to each of the multiple second information of the MT, where the second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information;
其中,该第一信息包括时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息,该时间差为DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差,该保护参数为DU资源与MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数,该符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,该符号索引信息为MT的可用资源的结束符号的索引。Wherein, the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information, the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, the protection parameter is the protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the symbol index information It is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息,或者,第二信息为小区组信息,时间差为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间的时间差,保护参数为DU资源与MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, the second information is reception configuration information, or the second information is cell group information, the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT downlink resource, and the protection parameter is the DU resource and the MT downlink resource The symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为接收配置信息,MT的多个第二信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。In a possible implementation, the second information is receiving configuration information, and the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,接收配置信息为通信设备的上级节点为MT配置的的接收配置信息,或者,接收配置信息为MT被配置的控制资源设置的接收配置信息,或者,接收配置信息为MT被配置的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的接收配置信息。In a possible implementation, the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the receiving configuration information is the receiving configuration information of the control resource settings configured by the MT, or the receiving configuration information is The reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH where the MT is configured.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为MT的发送配置信息,或者,第二信息为小区组信息;时间差为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间的时间差,保护参数为DU资源与MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,符号索引信息为MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。In a possible implementation, the second information is the transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information; the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the protection parameter is the difference between the DU resource and the MT. For protection parameters for switching between uplink resources, the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,第二信息为发送配置信息,MT的多个第二信息对应MT的一个小区组信息。In a possible implementation, the second information is sending configuration information, and the multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,发送配置信息为通信设备的上级节点为MT配置的的发送配置信息,或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的物理上行控制信道PUCCH的发送配置信息,或者,发送配置信息为MT被配置的探测参考信号SRS传输的发送配置信息。In a possible implementation, the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information configured by the upper node of the communication device for the MT, or the sending configuration information is the sending configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured by the MT, or the sending configuration The information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,资源确定装置部署在通信设备,或者,资源确定装置部署在通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。In a possible implementation, the resource determining apparatus is deployed in a communication device, or the resource determining apparatus is deployed in an upper node or a host node of the communication device.
在一种可能的实现中,若资源确定装置部署在通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,装置还包括:收发单元2103,用于接收通信设备上报的指示信息,指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息;In a possible implementation, if the device for determining the resource is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, the device further includes: a transceiving unit 2103, configured to receive indication information reported by the communication device, and the indication information is used to indicate multiple MTs. The first information corresponding to each second information in the second information;
若资源确定装置部署在通信设备,处理单元2101还用于:确定MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息。If the resource determining apparatus is deployed in a communication device, the processing unit 2101 is further configured to determine the first information corresponding to each second information among the multiple second information of the MT.
在一种可能的实现中,若资源确定装置部署在通信设备,装置还包括:收发单元2103,用于向第二节点上报指示信息,指示信息用于指示MT的多个第二信息中各个第二信息对应的第一信息,第二节点为通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。In a possible implementation, if the device for determining the resource is deployed in a communication device, the device further includes: a transceiver unit 2103, configured to report indication information to the second node, and the indication information is used to indicate each of the plurality of second information of the MT. The first information corresponding to the second information, and the second node is an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device.
基于与方法实施例的同一技术构思,本申请实施例提供一种保护参数确定装置。保护参数确定装置具体可以用于实现图20的实施例中第一节点执行的方法,该装置可以是第一节点本身,也可以是第一节点中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分,其中,第一节点可以是IAB节点,也可以是IAB节点的上级节点或宿主节点。该装置的结构可以如 图22所示,包括处理单元2201以及存储单元2202。其中:Based on the same technical idea as the method embodiment, the embodiment of the present application provides a protection parameter determination device. The protection parameter determination device may be specifically used to implement the method executed by the first node in the embodiment of FIG. 20. The device may be the first node itself, or the chip or chipset in the first node or the chip used to perform related Part of the method function, where the first node can be an IAB node, or an upper node or host node of the IAB node. The structure of the device may be as shown in FIG. 22, including a processing unit 2201 and a storage unit 2202. among them:
存储单元2202,用于存储代码指令;The storage unit 2202 is used to store code instructions;
处理单元2201,用于调用存储单元2202存储的代码指令执行:The processing unit 2201 is used to call the code stored in the storage unit 2202 to execute:
确定第一信息,该第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数,该第一保护参数为通信设备的移动终端MT资源与分布单元DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,该第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数;Determine first information. The first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter. The first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU. The second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU;
根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU are determined according to the first information.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第一保护参数和第二保护参数,MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为第一保护参数和第二保护参数中的最大值或最小值。In a possible implementation, the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is the maximum or minimum of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter. value.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第一保护参数,In a possible implementation, the first information includes the first protection parameter,
处理单元2201,还用于在确定第一信息之前,确定DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为上行;The processing unit 2201 is further configured to determine that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is uplink before determining the first information;
处理单元2201根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的方式具体为:确定第一保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The method for the processing unit 2201 to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically: determining the first protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,第一信息包括第二保护参数,处理单元2201,还用于在确定第一信息之前,确定DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为下行;In a possible implementation, the first information includes the second protection parameter, and the processing unit 2201 is further configured to determine that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is downlink before determining the first information;
处理单元2201根据第一信息确定MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的方式具体为:确定第二保护参数为MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The method for the processing unit 2201 to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically: determining the second protection parameter as the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,保护参数确定装置部署于通信设备,该装置还包括:In a possible implementation, the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
收发单元2203,用于接收通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点发送的配置信息,配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit 2203 is configured to receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,保护参数确定装置部署于通信设备,装置还包括:In a possible implementation, the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
收发单元2203,用于向通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点上报DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit 2203 is configured to report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
在一种可能的实现中,保护参数确定装置部署于通信设备,装置还包括:In a possible implementation, the protection parameter determination device is deployed in a communication device, and the device further includes:
收发单元2203,用于向通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点上报MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The transceiver unit 2203 is configured to report the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
在一种可能的实现中,保护参数确定装置部署于通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,装置还包括:In a possible implementation, the protection parameter determination device is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, and the device further includes:
收发单元2203,用于向通信设备发送配置信息,配置信息用于配置DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit 2203 is configured to send configuration information to the communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
在一种可能的实现中,保护参数确定装置部署于通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,装置还包括:In a possible implementation, the protection parameter determination device is deployed on the upper node or host node of the communication device, and the device further includes:
收发单元2203,用于接收通信设备上报的DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit 2203 is configured to receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device.
本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理器中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。可以理解的是,本申请实施例中各个单元的功能或者实现可以进一步参考方法实施例的相关描述。The division of units in the embodiments of this application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit. In the device, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It can be understood that, for the function or implementation of each unit in the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the related description of the method embodiment.
一种可能的方式中,资源确定装置可以如图23所示,该装置可以是第一节点或者第一节点中的芯片,其中,第一节点可以为通信设备,也可以为通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点。该装置可以包括处理器2301,通信接口2302,存储器2303。其中,处理单元2101可以为处理器2301。收发单元2103可以为通信接口2302。In one possible manner, the device for determining resources may be as shown in FIG. 23. The device may be the first node or a chip in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper-level node of the communication device. Or host node. The device may include a processor 2301, a communication interface 2302, and a memory 2303. The processing unit 2101 may be a processor 2301. The transceiver unit 2103 may be a communication interface 2302.
处理器2301,可以是一个中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),或者为数字处理单元等等。通信接口2302可以是收发器、也可以为接口电路如收发电路等、也可以为收发芯片等等。该装置还包括:存储器2303,用于存储处理器2301执行的程序。存储器2303可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器2303是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。The processor 2301 may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or a digital processing unit, and so on. The communication interface 2302 may be a transceiver, an interface circuit such as a transceiver circuit, etc., or a transceiver chip, and so on. The device also includes a memory 2303, which is used to store a program executed by the processor 2301. The memory 2303 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory, such as random access memory (random access memory). -access memory, RAM). The memory 2303 is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
处理器2301用于执行存储器2303存储的程序代码,具体用于执行上述处理单元2101的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。通信接口2302具体用于执行上述收发单元2103的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。存储器2303具体用于执行上述存储单元2102的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。The processor 2301 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2303, and is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned processing unit 2101, which will not be repeated here in this application. The communication interface 2302 is specifically configured to perform the actions of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 2103, which will not be repeated in this application. The memory 2303 is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned storage unit 2102, and details are not described herein again in this application.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口2302、处理器2301以及存储器2303之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图23中以存储器2303、处理器2301以及通信接口2302之间通过总线2304连接,总线在图23中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图23中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The specific connection medium between the aforementioned communication interface 2302, the processor 2301, and the memory 2303 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application in FIG. 23, the memory 2303, the processor 2301, and the communication interface 2302 are connected by a bus 2304. The bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 23. The connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 23 to represent it, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
一种可能的方式中,保护参数确定装置可以如图24所示,该装置可以是第一节点或者第一节点中的芯片,其中,第一节点可以为通信设备,也可以为通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点。该装置可以包括处理器2401,通信接口2402,存储器2403。其中,处理单元2201可以为处理器2401。收发单元2203可以为通信接口2402。In one possible manner, the protection parameter determination device may be as shown in FIG. 24, and the device may be the first node or a chip in the first node, where the first node may be a communication device or an upper level of the communication device. Node or host node. The device may include a processor 2401, a communication interface 2402, and a memory 2403. The processing unit 2201 may be a processor 2401. The transceiving unit 2203 may be a communication interface 2402.
处理器2401,可以是一个中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),或者为数字处理单元等等。通信接口2402可以是收发器、也可以为接口电路如收发电路等、也可以为收发芯片等等。该装置还包括:存储器2403,用于存储处理器2401执行的程序。存储器2403可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器2403是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。The processor 2401 may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or a digital processing unit, and so on. The communication interface 2402 may be a transceiver, an interface circuit such as a transceiver circuit, etc., or a transceiver chip, and so on. The device also includes a memory 2403, which is used to store a program executed by the processor 2401. The memory 2403 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., and may also be a volatile memory, such as random access memory (random access memory). -access memory, RAM). The memory 2403 is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
处理器2401用于执行存储器2403存储的程序代码,具体用于执行上述处理单元2201的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。通信接口2402具体用于执行上述收发单元2203的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。存储器2403具体用于执行上述存储单元2202的动作,本申请在此不再赘述。The processor 2401 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2403, and is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned processing unit 2201, which will not be repeated in this application. The communication interface 2402 is specifically configured to perform the actions of the above-mentioned transceiver unit 2203, which will not be repeated in this application. The memory 2403 is specifically configured to execute the actions of the above-mentioned storage unit 2202, and details are not described herein again in this application.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口2402、处理器2401以及存储器2403之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图24中以存储器2403、处理器2401以及通信接口2402之间通过总线2404连接,总线在图24中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图 24中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The specific connection medium between the aforementioned communication interface 2402, the processor 2401, and the memory 2403 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the application in FIG. 24, the memory 2403, the processor 2401, and the communication interface 2402 are connected by a bus 2404. The bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 24. The connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of presentation, only a thick line is used in Figure 24 to represent it, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
本发明实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储为执行上述处理器所需执行的计算机软件指令,其包含用于执行上述处理器所需执行的程序。The embodiment of the present invention also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer software instructions required to be executed to execute the foregoing processor, which contains a program required to execute the foregoing processor.
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在处理器上运行时,上述方法实施例的方法流程得以实现。The embodiment of the present invention also provides a computer program product. When the computer program product runs on a processor, the method flow of the above method embodiment is realized.
当使用软件实现本申请所提供的设备时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地实现本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程设备。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。When software is used to implement the equipment provided in this application, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are realized. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
本申请提供的各实施例的描述可以相互参照,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。为描述的方便和简洁,例如关于本申请实施例提供的各装置、设备的功能以及执行的步骤可以参照本申请方法实施例的相关描述,各方法实施例之间、各装置实施例之间也可以互相参考、结合或引用。The descriptions of the various embodiments provided in this application may refer to each other, and the descriptions of the various embodiments have their own emphasis. For parts that are not described in detail in an embodiment, reference may be made to related descriptions of other embodiments. For the convenience and brevity of description, for example, for the functions and execution steps of the devices and equipment provided in the embodiments of this application, please refer to the related descriptions of the method embodiments of this application. Can refer to each other, combine or cite.
最后应说明的是:以上各实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述各实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the application, not to limit them; although the application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: It is still possible to modify the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or equivalently replace some or all of the technical features; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application. range.

Claims (40)

  1. 一种资源确定方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining resources, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一节点确定通信设备的分布单元DU资源的时域位置;The first node determines the time domain location of the DU resource of the distribution unit of the communication device;
    所述第一节点确定所述通信设备的移动终端MT的多套时域位置,所述MT的多套时域位置与以下信息中的一项或多项有关:所述DU资源的时域位置、所述DU资源的资源类型、所述DU资源的资源性质、所述DU的动态资源指示信息、所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息,所述第二信息包括接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息;The first node determines multiple sets of time domain locations of the mobile terminal MT of the communication device, and the multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time domain location of the DU resource , The resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information of the DU, the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT, the The second information includes receiving configuration information, sending configuration information, or cell group information;
    其中,所述第一信息包括时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息,所述时间差为所述DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的可用资源的结束符号的索引。Wherein, the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information, the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the protection parameter is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource. For the protection parameter of the handover, the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述接收配置信息,或者,所述第二信息为所述小区组信息,所述时间差为所述DU资源与所述MT的下行资源之间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。The method according to claim 1, wherein the second information is the reception configuration information, or the second information is the cell group information, and the time difference is the DU resource and the The time difference between the downlink resources of the MT, the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, and the symbol index information is the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT Or, the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resources of the MT.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述接收配置信息,所述MT的多个第二信息对应所述MT的一个小区组信息。The method according to claim 2, wherein the second information is the receiving configuration information, and multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  4. 根据权利要求1~3中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收配置信息为所述通信设备的上级节点为所述MT配置的的接收配置信息,或者,所述接收配置信息为所述MT被配置的控制资源设置的接收配置信息,或者,所述接收配置信息为所述MT被配置的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的接收配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the receiving configuration information is receiving configuration information configured for the MT by an upper node of the communication device, or the receiving configuration information The reception configuration information set for the control resource configured by the MT, or the reception configuration information is the reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configured by the MT.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述MT的发送配置信息,或者,所述第二信息为所述小区组信息;所述时间差为所述DU资源与所述MT的上行资源之间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。The method according to claim 1, wherein the second information is transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information; and the time difference is the DU resource and The time difference between the uplink resources of the MT, the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the symbol index information is the start of the uplink available resources of the MT. The index of the start symbol, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述发送配置信息,所述MT的多个第二信息对应所述MT的一个小区组信息。The method according to claim 5, wherein the second information is the transmission configuration information, and multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  7. 根据权利要求1~6中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述发送配置信息为所述通信设备的上级节点为所述MT配置的的发送配置信息,或者,所述发送配置信息为所述MT 被配置的物理上行控制信道PUCCH的发送配置信息,或者,所述发送配置信息为所述MT被配置的探测参考信号SRS传输的发送配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the sending configuration information is sending configuration information configured for the MT by an upper node of the communication device, or the sending configuration information The transmission configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured for the MT, or the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
  8. 根据权利要求1~7中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备,或者,所述第一节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the first node is the communication device, or the first node is an upper node or a host node of the communication device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein if the first node is an upper node or a host node of the communication device, the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点接收所述通信设备上报的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息;Receiving, by the first node, the instruction information reported by the communication device, where the instruction information is used to indicate the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT;
    若所述第一节点为所述通信设备,所述方法还包括:If the first node is the communication device, the method further includes:
    所述第一节点确定所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息。The first node determines the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一节点为所述通信设备,在所述第一节点确定所述多个第一信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein if the first node is the communication device, after the first node determines the multiple pieces of first information, the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点向第二节点上报指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息,所述第二节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。The first node reports indication information to the second node, where the indication information is used to indicate the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT, and the second node is the The superior node or host node of the communication device.
  11. 一种保护参数确定方法,其特征在于,应用于第一节点,所述方法包括:A method for determining protection parameters is characterized in that it is applied to a first node, and the method includes:
    确定第一信息,所述第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数,所述第一保护参数为通信设备的移动终端MT资源与分布单元DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,所述第二保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数;Determining first information, where the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter, the first protection parameter being a protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU, The second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU;
    根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。Determine a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第一保护参数和所述第二保护参数,所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为所述第一保护参数和所述第二保护参数中的最大值或最小值。The method according to claim 11, wherein the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is The maximum value or the minimum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第一保护参数,所述确定第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the first information includes the first protection parameter, and before the first information is determined, the method further comprises:
    确定所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为上行;Determining that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is uplink;
    所述根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数,包括:The determining a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information includes:
    确定所述第一保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。It is determined that the first protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  14. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第二保护参数,所述确定第一信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the first information includes the second protection parameter, and before the first information is determined, the method further comprises:
    确定所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为下行;Determining that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is downlink;
    所述根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数, 包括:The determining a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information includes:
    确定所述第二保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。It is determined that the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first node is the communication device, and the method further comprises:
    接收所述第一节点的上级节点或宿主节点发送的配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。Receiving configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the first node, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  16. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first node is the communication device, and the method further comprises:
    向上级节点或宿主节点上报所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。Report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the superior node or the host node.
  17. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first node is the communication device, and the method further comprises:
    向上级节点或宿主节点上报所述MT资源与DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is reported to the superior node or the host node.
  18. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first node is an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the method further comprises:
    向所述通信设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。Sending configuration information to the communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  19. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first node is an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the method further comprises:
    接收所述通信设备上报的所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。Receiving the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device.
  20. 一种资源确定装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A resource determining device, characterized in that the device includes:
    存储单元,用于存储代码指令;Storage unit, used to store code instructions;
    处理单元,用于调用所述存储单元存储的代码指令执行:The processing unit is used to call the code stored in the storage unit to execute:
    确定通信设备的分布单元DU资源的时域位置;Determine the time domain location of the DU resource of the distribution unit of the communication device;
    确定所述通信设备的移动终端MT的多套时域位置,所述MT的多套时域位置与以下信息中的一项或多项有关:所述DU资源的时域位置、所述DU资源的资源类型、所述DU资源的资源性质、所述DU的动态资源指示信息、所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息,所述第二信息包括接收配置信息、发送配置信息或小区组信息;Determine multiple sets of time domain locations of the mobile terminal MT of the communication device, where the multiple sets of time domain locations of the MT are related to one or more of the following information: the time domain location of the DU resource, the DU resource The resource type of the DU resource, the resource nature of the DU resource, the dynamic resource indication information of the DU, the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT, and the second information includes receiving Configuration information, sending configuration information or cell group information;
    其中,所述第一信息包括时间差、保护参数或符号索引信息,所述时间差为所述DU资源与MT资源之间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的可用资源的结束符号的索引。Wherein, the first information includes time difference, protection parameter or symbol index information, the time difference is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource, and the protection parameter is the time difference between the DU resource and the MT resource. For the protection parameter of the handover, the symbol index information is the index of the start symbol of the available resource of the MT, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the available resource of the MT.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述接收配置信息,或者,所述第二信息为所述小区组信息,所述时间差为所述DU资源与所述MT的下行资源之 间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT的下行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的下行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的下行可用资源的结束符号的索引。The apparatus according to claim 20, wherein the second information is the reception configuration information, or the second information is the cell group information, and the time difference is the DU resource and the The time difference between the downlink resources of the MT, the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the downlink resource of the MT, and the symbol index information is the start symbol of the downlink available resource of the MT Or, the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the downlink available resources of the MT.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述接收配置信息,所述MT的多个第二信息对应所述MT的一个小区组信息。The apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the second information is the receiving configuration information, and multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  23. 根据权利要求20~22中任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收配置信息为所述通信设备的上级节点为所述MT配置的的接收配置信息,或者,所述接收配置信息为所述MT被配置的控制资源设置的接收配置信息,或者,所述接收配置信息为所述MT被配置的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的接收配置信息。The apparatus according to any one of claims 20-22, wherein the receiving configuration information is receiving configuration information configured for the MT by an upper node of the communication device, or the receiving configuration information The reception configuration information set for the control resource configured by the MT, or the reception configuration information is the reception configuration information of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configured by the MT.
  24. 根据权利要求20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述MT的发送配置信息,或者,所述第二信息为所述小区组信息;所述时间差为所述DU资源与所述MT的上行资源之间的时间差,所述保护参数为所述DU资源与所述MT的上行资源之间进行切换的保护参数,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的上行可用资源的起始符号的索引,或者,所述符号索引信息为所述MT的上行可用资源的结束符号的索引。The apparatus according to claim 20, wherein the second information is transmission configuration information of the MT, or the second information is the cell group information; and the time difference is the DU resource and The time difference between the uplink resources of the MT, the protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the DU resource and the uplink resource of the MT, and the symbol index information is the start of the uplink available resources of the MT. The index of the start symbol, or the symbol index information is the index of the end symbol of the uplink available resources of the MT.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二信息为所述发送配置信息,所述MT的多个第二信息对应所述MT的一个小区组信息。The apparatus according to claim 24, wherein the second information is the transmission configuration information, and multiple pieces of second information of the MT correspond to one cell group information of the MT.
  26. 根据权利要求20~25中任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送配置信息为所述通信设备的上级节点为所述MT配置的的发送配置信息,或者,所述发送配置信息为所述MT被配置的物理上行控制信道PUCCH的发送配置信息,或者,所述发送配置信息为所述MT被配置的探测参考信号SRS传输的发送配置信息。The apparatus according to any one of claims 20 to 25, wherein the transmission configuration information is transmission configuration information configured for the MT by an upper node of the communication device, or the transmission configuration information The transmission configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH configured for the MT, or the transmission configuration information is the transmission configuration information of the sounding reference signal SRS transmission configured by the MT.
  27. 根据权利要求20~26中任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述资源确定装置部署在所述通信设备,或者,所述资源确定装置部署在所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。The apparatus according to any one of claims 20 to 26, wherein the resource determining apparatus is deployed on the communication device, or the resource determining apparatus is deployed on an upper node or a host node of the communication device .
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述资源确定装置部署在所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述装置还包括:收发单元,用于接收所述通信设备上报的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息;The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein if the resource determining apparatus is deployed on an upper-level node or a host node of the communication device, the apparatus further comprises: a transceiver unit, configured to receive information reported by the communication device Indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the first information corresponding to each of the second information in the plurality of second information of the MT;
    若所述资源确定装置部署在所述通信设备,所述处理单元还用于:确定所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息。If the resource determining apparatus is deployed in the communication device, the processing unit is further configured to determine the first information corresponding to each of the second information of the MT.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述资源确定装置部署在所述通信设备,所述装置还包括:收发单元,用于向第二节点上报指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述MT的多个第二信息中各个所述第二信息对应的第一信息,所述第二节点为所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点。The device according to claim 28, wherein if the resource determining device is deployed in the communication device, the device further comprises: a transceiver unit, configured to report instruction information to the second node, and the instruction information is used for To indicate the first information corresponding to each of the second information in the plurality of second information of the MT, the second node is an upper node or a host node of the communication device.
  30. 一种保护参数确定装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A protection parameter determination device, characterized in that the device includes:
    存储单元,用于存储代码指令;Storage unit, used to store code instructions;
    处理单元,用于调用所述存储单元存储的代码指令执行:The processing unit is used to call the code stored in the storage unit to execute:
    确定第一信息,所述第一信息包括第一保护参数和/或第二保护参数,所述第一保护参数为通信设备的移动终端MT资源与分布单元DU的上行资源进行切换的保护参数,所述第二保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的下行资源进行切换的保护参数;Determining first information, where the first information includes a first protection parameter and/or a second protection parameter, the first protection parameter being a protection parameter for switching between the mobile terminal MT resource of the communication device and the uplink resource of the distribution unit DU, The second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the downlink resource of the DU;
    根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。Determine a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第一保护参数和所述第二保护参数,所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数为所述第一保护参数和所述第二保护参数中的最大值或最小值。The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the first information includes the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter, and the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU is The maximum value or the minimum value of the first protection parameter and the second protection parameter.
  32. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第一保护参数,The device according to claim 30, wherein the first information includes the first protection parameter,
    所述处理单元,还用于在确定第一信息之前,确定所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为上行;The processing unit is further configured to determine that the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU is uplink before determining the first information;
    所述处理单元根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的方式具体为:确定所述第一保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。The method for the processing unit to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically: determining that the first protection parameter is the flexibility between the MT resource and the DU Protection parameters for resource switching.
  33. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括所述第二保护参数,所述处理单元,还用于在确定第一信息之前,确定所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型为下行;The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the first information includes the second protection parameter, and the processing unit is further configured to determine the flexible resource assumption of the DU before determining the first information The resource type is downlink;
    所述处理单元根据所述第一信息确定所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数的方式具体为:The method for the processing unit to determine the protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU according to the first information is specifically as follows:
    确定所述第二保护参数为所述MT资源与所述DU的灵活资源进行切换的保护参数。It is determined that the second protection parameter is a protection parameter for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU.
  34. 根据权利要求32或33述的装置,其特征在于,所述保护参数确定装置部署于所述通信设备,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the protection parameter determination device is deployed in the communication equipment, and the device further comprises:
    收发单元,用于接收所述通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点发送的配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit is configured to receive configuration information sent by an upper node or a host node of the communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  35. 根据权利要求32或33述的装置,其特征在于,所述保护参数确定装置部署于所述通信设备,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the protection parameter determination device is deployed in the communication equipment, and the device further comprises:
    收发单元,用于向所述通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点上报所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit is configured to report the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
  36. 根据权利要求32或33述的装置,其特征在于,所述保护参数确定装置部署于所述通信设备,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the protection parameter determination device is deployed in the communication equipment, and the device further comprises:
    收发单元,用于向所述通信设备的上级节点或宿主节点上报所述MT资源与DU的灵活 资源进行切换的保护参数。The transceiver unit is configured to report the protection parameters for switching between the MT resource and the flexible resource of the DU to the upper node or the host node of the communication device.
  37. 根据权利要求32或33述的装置,其特征在于,所述保护参数确定装置部署于所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the protection parameter determination device is deployed on an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the device further comprises:
    收发单元,用于向所述通信设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit is configured to send configuration information to the communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure a hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU.
  38. 根据权利要求32或33述的装置,其特征在于,所述保护参数确定装置部署于所述通信设备的上级节点或者宿主节点,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the protection parameter determination device is deployed on an upper node or a host node of the communication device, and the device further comprises:
    收发单元,用于接收所述通信设备上报的所述DU的灵活资源的假设资源类型。The transceiver unit is configured to receive the hypothetical resource type of the flexible resource of the DU reported by the communication device.
  39. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储程序或指令,所述程序或所述指令在被一个或多个处理器读取并执行时可实现权利要求1至19任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein a program or instruction is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and the program or the instruction can implement claim 1 when read and executed by one or more processors The method described in any one of to 19.
  40. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在网络设备上运行时,使得所述网络设备执行权利要求1至19任一所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product runs on a network device, the network device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 19.
PCT/CN2020/119061 2019-09-30 2020-09-29 Resource determination method and device WO2021063372A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910944792 2019-09-30
CN201910944792.0 2019-09-30
CN201911061070.7 2019-11-01
CN201911061070 2019-11-01
CN202010444159.8A CN112584518A (en) 2019-09-30 2020-05-22 Resource determination method and device
CN202010444159.8 2020-05-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021063372A1 true WO2021063372A1 (en) 2021-04-08

Family

ID=75119351

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/119061 WO2021063372A1 (en) 2019-09-30 2020-09-29 Resource determination method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112584518A (en)
WO (1) WO2021063372A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022226986A1 (en) * 2021-04-30 2022-11-03 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Method and apparatus for wireless communication
CN115733597A (en) * 2021-09-01 2023-03-03 华为技术有限公司 Protection symbol configuration method and communication device
CN115942466A (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-07 维沃移动通信有限公司 Method and device for determining protection symbol and network equipment
CN116939829A (en) * 2022-04-02 2023-10-24 华为技术有限公司 Transmission method and related device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190124572A1 (en) * 2017-10-20 2019-04-25 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Non-Access Stratum Capability Information
US20190132847A1 (en) * 2017-10-30 2019-05-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for prioritization for transmission power control in 5g
WO2019083682A1 (en) * 2017-10-27 2019-05-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Power control for concurrent reception

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190124572A1 (en) * 2017-10-20 2019-04-25 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Non-Access Stratum Capability Information
WO2019083682A1 (en) * 2017-10-27 2019-05-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Power control for concurrent reception
US20190132847A1 (en) * 2017-10-30 2019-05-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for prioritization for transmission power control in 5g

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CMCC: "Discussion on resource multiplexing among backhaul and access links", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1908862, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Prague, CZ; 20190826 - 20190830, 16 August 2019 (2019-08-16), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051765470 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112584518A (en) 2021-03-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021063372A1 (en) Resource determination method and device
WO2019149100A1 (en) Timing method and device
WO2020220849A1 (en) Data receiving and transmitting method and apparatus
EP3911076A1 (en) Method and apparatus for resource configuration
US11265871B2 (en) Relay transmission method and apparatus
KR20190105239A (en) Apparatus and method for switching between different numerologies
WO2021032065A1 (en) Resource multiplexing method and apparatus
WO2020199846A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20220394737A1 (en) Resource configuration method and network device
US11425739B2 (en) Scheduling method and device
US20220174636A1 (en) Timing Synchronization Method and Apparatus
WO2018171666A1 (en) Information transceiving method and device
CN114070503A (en) QCL (quaternary clock language) indication method and related equipment
WO2018202188A1 (en) Communication method, system and related device
JP2019500815A (en) Wireless communication method and system and device
US20230076450A1 (en) Resource multiplexing method and apparatus
CN111479326B (en) Information sending and detecting method and device
WO2021062689A1 (en) Method and apparatus for uplink transmission
US11956803B2 (en) Method and apparatus for determining transmission resource
WO2021031224A1 (en) Timing synchronization method and device
WO2023051755A1 (en) Resource configuration method and communication apparatus
WO2023245546A1 (en) Method and apparatus of dynamic adaption of spatial elements
WO2024020963A1 (en) Demodulation reference signal (dmrs) configuration method and apparatus, and device and medium
WO2024011632A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2023123073A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20872346

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20872346

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1